PA600X/PA500X/ PA550W/PA500U

Portable Projector

PA600X/PA500X/ PA550W/PA500UUser’s Manual

Model No.NP-PA600X/NP-PA500X/NP-PA550W/NP-PA500U

1st edition, February 2011

• Macintosh,MacOSXandPowerBookaretrademarksofAppleInc.registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.

• Microsoft,Windows,WindowsVista, InternetExplorer, .NETFrameworkandPowerPointareeitheraregisteredtrademarkortrademarkofMicrosoftCorporationintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.

• MicroSaverisaregisteredtrademarkofKensingtonComputerProductsGroup,adivisionofACCOBrands.

• Adobe,AdobePDF,AdobeReader,andAcrobatareeitherregisteredtrademarksortrademarksofAdobeSystemsIncorporatedintheUnitedStatesand/orothercountries.

• IDTandHQVaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofIntegratedDeviceTechnology,Inc.

• VirtualRemoteToolusesWinI2C/DDClibrary,©NicomsoftLtd.

• HDMI,theHDMILogoandHigh-DefinitionMultimediaInterfacearetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofHDMILicensingLLC.

• DisplayPort,DisplayPortCertifiedLogo,VESA,andVESAlogoaretrademarksoftheVideoElectronicsStandardsAssociation,registeredintheU.S.andothercountries.

• TrademarkPJLinkisatrademarkappliedfortrademarkrightsinJapan,theUnitedStatesofAmericaandothercountriesandareas.

• Wi-Fi®,Wi-FiAlliance®,andWi-FiProtectedAccess(WPA,WPA2)®are registered trademarksof theWi-FiAlli-ance.

• Blu-rayisatrademarkofBlu-rayDiscAssociation

• Crestron,CrestronControl,andCrestronRoomViewaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofCrestronElectron-ics,Inc.

• Otherproductandcompanynamesmentionedinthisuser’smanualmaybethetrademarksorregisteredtrademarksoftheirrespectiveholders.

NOTES(1)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualmaynotbereprintedinpartorwholewithoutpermission.

(2)Thecontentsofthisuser’smanualaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

(3)Greatcarehasbeentakeninthepreparationofthisuser’smanual;however,shouldyounoticeanyquestionablepoints,errorsoromissions,pleasecontactus.

(4)Notwithstandingarticle(3),NECwillnotberesponsibleforanyclaimsonlossofprofitorothermattersdeemedtoresultfromusingtheProjector.

i

Important InformationSafety CautionsPrecautionsPleasereadthismanualcarefullybeforeusingyourNECprojectorandkeepthemanualhandyforfuturereference.

CAUTIONToturnoffmainpower,besuretoremovetheplugfrompoweroutlet.Thepoweroutletsocketshouldbeinstalledasneartotheequipmentaspossible,andshouldbeeasilyaccessible.

CAUTIONTOPREVENTSHOCK,DONOTOPENTHECABINET.THEREAREHIGH-VOLTAGECOMPONENTSINSIDE.REFERSERVICINGTOQUALIFIEDSERVICEPERSONNEL.

Thissymbolwarnstheuserthatuninsulatedvoltagewithintheunitmaybesufficienttocauseelectricalshock.Therefore,itisdangeroustomakeanykindofcontactwithanypartinsideoftheunit.

Thissymbolalertstheuserthatimportantinformationconcerningtheoperationandmaintenanceofthisunithasbeenprovided.Theinformationshouldbereadcarefullytoavoidproblems.

WARNING: TOPREVENTFIREORSHOCK,DONOTEXPOSETHISUNITTORAINORMOISTURE.DONOTUSETHISUNIT’SPLUGWITHANEXTENSIONCORDORINANOUTLETUNLESSALLTHEPRONGSCANBEFULLYINSERTED.

DOC Compliance Notice (for Canada only)ThisClassBdigitalapparatusmeetsall requirementsof theCanadian Interference-CausingEquipmentRegula-tions.

Machine Noise Information Regulation - 3. GPSGV,Thehighestsoundpressurelevelislessthan70dB(A)inaccordancewithENISO7779.

CAUTIONAvoiddisplayingstationaryimagesforaprolongedperiodoftime.

DoingsocanresultintheseimagesbeingtemporarilysustainedonthesurfaceoftheLCDpanel.

Ifthisshouldhappen,continuetouseyourprojector.Thestaticbackgroundfrompreviousimageswilldisappear.

Disposing of your used productEU-widelegislationasimplementedineachMemberStaterequiresthatusedelectricalandelectronicproductscarryingthemark(left)mustbedisposedofseparatelyfromnormalhouseholdwaste.Thisin-cludesprojectorsandtheirelectricalaccessoriesorlamps.Whenyoudisposeofsuchproducts,pleasefollowtheguidanceofyourlocalauthorityand/orasktheshopwhereyoupurchasedtheproduct.Aftercollectingtheusedproducts,theyarereusedandrecycledinaproperway.Thiseffortwillhelpusreducethewastesaswellasthenegativeimpactsuchasmercurycontainedinalamptothehumanhealthandtheenvironmentattheminimumlevel.ThemarkontheelectricalandelectronicproductsonlyappliestothecurrentEuropeanUnionMemberStates.

ii

Important Information

WARNING TO CALIFORNIA RESIDENTS:Handlingthecablessuppliedwiththisproductwillexposeyoutolead,achemicalknowntotheStateofCaliforniatocausebirthdefectsorotherreproductiveharm.WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING.

RF Interference (for USA only)

WARNINGTheFederalCommunicationsCommissiondoesnotallowanymodificationsorchangestotheunitEXCEPTthosespecifiedbyNECDisplaySolutionsofAmerica,Inc.inthismanual.Failuretocomplywiththisgovernmentregu-lationcouldvoidyourrighttooperatethisequipment.ThisequipmenthasbeentestedandfoundtocomplywiththelimitsforaClassBdigitaldevice,pursuanttoPart15oftheFCCRules.Theselimitsaredesignedtoprovidereasonableprotectionagainstharmfulinterferenceinaresidentialinstallation.Thisequipmentgenerates,uses,andcanradiateradiofrequencyenergyand,ifnotinstalledandusedinaccordancewiththeinstructions,maycauseharmfulinterferencetoradiocommunications.However,thereisnoguaranteethatinterferencewillnotoccurinaparticularinstallation.Ifthisequipmentdoescauseharmfulinterferencetoradioortelevisionreception,whichcanbedeterminedbyturningtheequipmentoffandon,theuserisencouragedtotrytocorrecttheinterferencebyoneormoreofthefollowingmeasures:

•Reorientorrelocatethereceivingantenna.

•Increasetheseparationbetweentheequipmentandreceiver.

•Connecttheequipmentintoanoutletonacircuitdifferentfromthattowhichthereceiverisconnected.

•Consultthedealeroranexperiencedradio/TVtechnicianforhelp.

ForUKonly:InUK,aBSapprovedpowercordwithmouldedplughasaBlack(fiveAmps)fuseinstalledforusewiththisequipment.Ifapowercordisnotsuppliedwiththisequipmentpleasecontactyoursupplier.

Important SafeguardsThesesafetyinstructionsaretoensurethelonglifeofyourprojectorandtopreventfireandshock.Pleasereadthemcarefullyandheedallwarnings.

Installation

•Donotplacetheprojectorinthefollowingconditions:

-onanunstablecart,stand,ortable.

-nearwater,baths,ordamprooms.

-indirectsunlight,nearheaters,orheatradiatingappliances.

-inadusty,smokyorsteamyenvironment.

-onasheetofpaperorcloth,rugsorcarpets.

•Ifyouwishtohavetheprojectorinstalledontheceiling:

-Donotattempttoinstalltheprojectoryourself.

-Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetheriskofbodilyinjury.

-Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.

-Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.

iii


Fire and Shock Precautions

• Ensurethatthereissufficientventilationandthatventsareunobstructedtopreventthebuild-upofheatinsideyourprojector.Allowatleast4inches(10cm)ofspacebetweenyourprojectorandawall.

• Donottrytotouchtheventilationoutletontheleftfront(whenseenfromthefront)asitcanbecomeheatedwhiletheprojectoristurnedonandimmediatelyaftertheprojectoristurnedoff.Partsoftheprojectormaybecometem-porarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.

Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.

• Preventforeignobjectssuchaspaperclipsandbitsofpaperfromfallingintoyourprojector.Donotattempttoretrieveanyobjectsthatmightfallintoyourprojector.Donotinsertanymetalobjectssuchasawireorscrewdriverintoyourprojector.Ifsomethingshouldfallintoyourprojector,disconnectitimmediatelyandhavetheobjectremovedbyaqualifiedservicepersonnel.

• Donotplaceanyobjectsontopoftheprojector.• Donottouchthepowerplugduringathunderstorm.Doingsocancauseelectricalshockorfire.• Theprojectorisdesignedtooperateonapowersupplyof100-240VAC50/60Hz.Ensurethatyourpowersupply

fitsthisrequirementbeforeattemptingtouseyourprojector.• Donotlookintothelenswhiletheprojectorison.Seriousdamagetoyoureyescouldresult.

• Keepanyitems(magnifyingglassetc.)outofthelightpathoftheprojector.Thelightpathbeingprojectedfromthelensisextensive,thereforeanykindofabnormalobjectsthatcanredirectlightcomingoutofthelens,cancauseanunpredictableoutcomesuchasafireorinjurytotheeyes.

• Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontofaprojectorexhaustvent. Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingorgettingyourhandsburnedfromtheheatthatisemittedfromtheex-

haust.

WARNING•Donotcoverthelenswiththelenscaporequivalentwhiletheprojectorison.Doingsocanleadtomeltingofthecapduetotheheatemittedfromthelightoutput.

•Donotplaceanyobjects,whichareeasilyaffectedbyheat,infrontoftheprojectorlens.Doingsocouldleadtotheobjectmeltingfromtheheatthatisemittedfromthelightoutput.

Donottilttheprojectortotheleftorright.Doingsomayresultinmalfunction.Thereisnolimitonthetiltangleupwardordownward.Selectanappropriateoptionfor[FANMODE]accordingtotheinstallationangle.

iv


• Handlethepowercordcarefully.Adamagedorfrayedpowercordcancauseelectricshockorfire.- Donotuseanypowercordotherthantheonesuppliedwiththeprojector.- Donotbendortugthepowercordexcessively.- Donotplacethepowercordundertheprojector,oranyheavyobject.- Donotcoverthepowercordwithothersoftmaterialssuchasrugs.- Donotheatthepowercord.- Donothandlethepowerplugwithwethands.

• Turnofftheprojector,unplugthepowercordandhavetheprojectorservicedbyaqualifiedservicepersonnelunderthefollowingconditions:- Whenthepowercordorplugisdamagedorfrayed.- Ifliquidhasbeenspilledintotheprojector,orifithasbeenexposedtorainorwater.- Iftheprojectordoesnotoperatenormallywhenyoufollowtheinstructionsdescribedinthisuser’smanual.- Iftheprojectorhasbeendroppedorthecabinethasbeendamaged.- Iftheprojectorexhibitsadistinctchangeinperformance,indicatinganeedforservice.

• Disconnectthepowercordandanyothercablesbeforecarryingtheprojector.• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordbeforecleaningthecabinetorreplacingthelamp.• Turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercordiftheprojectorisnottobeusedforanextendedperiodoftime.• WhenusingaLANcable: Forsafety,donotconnecttotheconnectorforperipheraldevicewiringthatmighthaveexcessivevoltage.

CAUTION• Donotusethetilt-footforpurposesotherthanoriginallyintended.Misusessuchasgrippingthetilt-footor

hangingonthewallcancausedamagetotheprojector.

• Donotsendtheprojectorinthesoftcasebyparceldeliveryserviceorcargoshipment.Theprojectorinsidethesoftcasecouldbedamaged.

• Select[HIGH]inFanmodeifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforconsecutivedays.(Fromthemenu,select[SETUP]→[OPTIONS(1)]→[FANMODE]→[MODE]→[HIGH].)

• Donotmovetheprojectorbyholdingthecablecover.Doingsomayresultintheprojectorfallingorcausinginjury.

• BeforeusingDirectPowerOff,besuretoallowatleast20minutesimmediatelyafterturningontheprojectorandstartingtodisplayanimage.

• Donotunplugthepowercablefromthewalloutletorprojectorwhentheprojectorispoweredon.DoingsocancausedamagetotheACINconnectoroftheprojectorand(or)theprongplugofthepowercable.

ToturnofftheACpowersupplywhentheprojectorispoweredon,useapowerstripequippedwithaswitchandabreaker.

• DonotturnofftheACpowerfor60secondsafterthelampisturnedonandwhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblue.Doingsocouldcauseprematurelampfailure.

Caution on Handling the Optional LensWhenshippingtheprojectorwiththelens,removethelensbeforeshippingtheprojector.Alwaysattachthedustcaptothelenswheneveritisnotmountedontheprojector.Thelensandthelensshiftmechanismmayencounterdamagecausedbyimproperhandlingduringtransportation.Donotholdthelenspartwhencarryingtheprojector.Doingsocouldcausethefocusringtorotate,resultinginaccidentaldroppingoftheprojector.

Remote Control Precautions• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.

• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.

• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.

• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.

v


• Donotthrowbatteriesintofire.

• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.

• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.

• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.

• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.

Note for US ResidentsThelampinthisproductcontainsmercury.PleasedisposeaccordingtoLocal,StateorFederalLaws.

Lamp Replacement• Usethespecifiedlampforsafetyandperformance.

• Toreplacethelamp,followallinstructionsprovidedonpage159.

• Besuretoreplacethelampandfilterwhenthemessage[THE LAMP HAS REACHED THE END OF ITS US-ABLE LIFE. PLEASE REPLACE THE LAMP AND FILTER. USE THE SPECIFIED LAMP FOR SAFETY AND PERFORMANCE.]appears.Ifyoucontinuetousethelampafterthelamphasreachedtheendofitsusablelife,thelampbulbmayshatter,andpiecesofglassmaybescatteredinthelampcase.Donottouchthemasthepiecesofglassmaycauseinjury.

Ifthishappens,contactyourdealerforlampreplacement.

A Lamp CharacteristicTheprojectorhasahigh-pressuremercurylampasalightsource.Alamphasacharacteristicthatitsbrightnessgraduallydecreaseswithage.Alsorepeatedlyturningthelamponandoffwillincreasethepossibilityofitslowerbrightness.

CAUTION:

• DONOTTOUCHTHELAMPimmediatelyafterithasbeenused.Itwillbeextremelyhot.Turntheprojectoroffandthendisconnectthepowercord.Allowatleastonehourforthelamptocoolbeforehandling.

• Whenremovingthelampfromaceiling-mountedprojector,makesurethatnooneisundertheprojector.Glassfragmentscouldfallifthelamphasbeenburnedout.

About High Altitude mode• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersor

higher. Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]

cancausetheprojectortooverheatandtheprotectorcouldshutdown.Ifthishappens,waitacoupleminutesandturnontheprojector.

• Usingtheprojectorataltitudeslessthanapproximately5500feet/1600metersandsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancausethelamptoovercool,causingtheimagetoflicker.Switch[FANMODE]to[AUTO].

• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofopticalcom-ponentssuchasthelamp.

About Copyright of original projected pictures:Pleasenotethatusingthisprojectorforthepurposeofcommercialgainortheattractionofpublicattentioninavenuesuchasacoffeeshoporhotelandemployingcompressionorexpansionofthescreenimagewiththefollowingfunc-tionsmayraiseconcernabouttheinfringementofcopyrightswhichareprotectedbycopyrightlaw.[ASPECTRATIO],[KEYSTONE],Magnifyingfeatureandothersimilarfeatures.

Turkish RoHS information relevant for Turkish marketEEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur.

Thisdeviceisnotintendedforuseinthedirectfieldofviewatvisualdisplayworkplaces.Toavoidincommodingreflec-tionsatvisualdisplayworkplacesthisdevicemustnotbeplacedinthedirectfieldofview.

vi

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsImportant Information ............................................................................................i

CautiononHandlingtheOptionalLens ................................................................... iv

1. Introduction .......................................................................................................... 11What’sintheBox? ......................................................................................................... 1IntroductiontotheProjector .......................................................................................... 2

CongratulationsonYourPurchaseoftheProjector ................................................. 2Featuresyou’llenjoy: ............................................................................................... 2Aboutthisuser’smanual .......................................................................................... 3

PartNamesoftheProjector .......................................................................................... 4Front/Top .................................................................................................................. 4Rear ......................................................................................................................... 5ControlPanel/IndicatorSection................................................................................6TerminalPanelFeatures .......................................................................................... 7

PartNamesoftheRemoteControl ............................................................................... 8BatteryInstallation ................................................................................................... 9RemoteControlPrecautions .................................................................................... 9OperatingRangeforWirelessRemoteControl ........................................................ 9

OperatingEnvironmentforSoftwareIncludedonCD-ROM ........................................ 10OperatingEnvironment .......................................................................................... 11

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation) .............................................. 121FlowofProjectinganImage ........................................................................................ 12ConnectingYourComputer/ConnectingthePowerCord ............................................. 13TurningontheProjector .............................................................................................. 14

NoteonStartupscreen(MenuLanguageSelectscreen) ...................................... 15SelectingaSource ...................................................................................................... 16

Selectingthecomputerorvideosource................................................................. 16AdjustingthePictureSizeandPosition ....................................................................... 17

Adjustingtheverticalpositionofaprojectedimage(Lensshift) ............................ 18Focus ..................................................................................................................... 19Applicablelens:NP11FL........................................................................................20Zoom ...................................................................................................................... 21AdjustingtheTiltFeet ............................................................................................ 21

CorrectingKeystoneDistortion .................................................................................... 22OptimizingComputerSignalAutomatically ................................................................. 24

AdjustingtheImageUsingAutoAdjust .................................................................. 24TurningUporDownVolume ........................................................................................ 24TurningofftheProjector .............................................................................................. 25AfterUse...................................................................................................................... 26

3. Convenient Features ..................................................................................... 271TurningofftheImageandSound ................................................................................ 27FreezingaPicture ....................................................................................................... 27EnlargingaPicture ...................................................................................................... 27

vii

Table of Contents

ChangingEcoMode/CheckingEnergy-SavingEffectUsingEcoMode[ECOMODE] ................................................................................................................... 28CheckingEnergy-SavingEffect[CARBONMETER] ............................................. 29

UsingtheOptionalRemoteMouseReceiver(NP01MR) ............................................ 30 CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion[CORNERSTONE] ................ 32

Cornerstone ........................................................................................................... 32 DisplayingTwoPicturesattheSameTime .................................................................. 35

SelectingthePIPorPICTUREBYPICTUREMode[MODE] ................................ 35[POSITION] ............................................................................................................ 36

PreventingtheUnauthorizedUseoftheProjector[SECURITY] ...................................... 37ControllingtheProjectorbyUsinganHTTPBrowser ................................................. 40ProjectingYourComputer’sScreenImagefromtheProjectorviaaNetwork

[NETWORKPROJECTOR] .................................................................................... 47UsingtheProjectortoOperateYourComputerviaaNetwork[REMOTE

DESKTOP] ............................................................................................................. 51

4. Using the Viewer ............................................................................................. 56❶WhatyoucandowiththeViewer ................................................................................. 56❷Preparingpresentationmaterials ................................................................................ 59❸ProjectingimagesstoredinaUSBmemorydevice .................................................... 60

StartingtheViewer ................................................................................................. 60ExitingtheViewer .................................................................................................. 63NamesandfunctionsofViewerscreen .................................................................. 64Vieweroptionsettings ............................................................................................ 69

❹Projectingdatafromsharedfolder .............................................................................. 72Connectingtheprojectortothesharedfolder ....................................................... 72Disconnectingthesharedfolderfromtheprojector ............................................... 75

❺Projectingdatafrommediaserver............................................................................... 76Settingup“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer 11 ...................................... 76Settingup“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer12 ...................................... 78Connectingtheprojectortothemediaserver ........................................................ 79Disconnectingtheprojectorfromthemediaserver ............................................... 80

❻Restrictionsondisplayingfiles .................................................................................... 81SomerestrictionsonPowerPointfiles .................................................................... 81SomerestrictionsonPDFfiles .............................................................................. 81

5. Using On-Screen Menu ................................................................................ 821UsingtheMenus .......................................................................................................... 82MenuElements ............................................................................................................ 83ListofMenuItems ....................................................................................................... 84MenuDescriptions&Functions[SOURCE] ................................................................ 87

COMPUTER1, 2, and 3 ........................................................................................ 87HDMI ...................................................................................................................... 87DisplayPort ............................................................................................................. 87VIDEO .................................................................................................................... 87S-VIDEO ................................................................................................................ 87VIEWER ................................................................................................................. 87NETWORK ............................................................................................................. 87

viii

Table of Contents

ENTRYLIST .......................................................................................................... 87TESTPATTERN ..................................................................................................... 87

MenuDescriptions&Functions[ADJUST] .................................................................. 91[PICTURE] ............................................................................................................. 91[IMAGEOPTIONS] ................................................................................................ 94[VIDEO] .................................................................................................................. 98

MenuDescriptions&Functions[SETUP] .................................................................. 100[BASIC] ................................................................................................................ 100[MENU] ................................................................................................................ 102[INSTALLATION(1)] .............................................................................................. 103[INSTALLATION(2)] .............................................................................................. 106[OPTIONS(1)] ...................................................................................................... 108[OPTIONS(2)] ...................................................................................................... 110

MenuDescriptions&Functions[INFO.] .................................................................... 112[USAGETIME] ..................................................................................................... 112[SOURCE(1)] ....................................................................................................... 113[SOURCE(2)] ....................................................................................................... 113[WIREDLAN] ....................................................................................................... 113[WIRELESSLAN(1)] ............................................................................................ 114[WIRELESSLAN(2)] ............................................................................................ 114[VERSION(1)] ...................................................................................................... 114[VERSION(2)] ...................................................................................................... 115[OTHERS] ............................................................................................................ 115

MenuDescriptions&Functions[RESET] .................................................................. 116ReturningtoFactoryDefault[RESET] ................................................................. 116

❾ApplicationMenu ....................................................................................................... 118IMAGEEXPRESSUTILITY ................................................................................. 118DESKTOPCONTROLUTILITY ........................................................................... 118NETWORKPROJECTOR .................................................................................... 119REMOTEDESKTOPCONNECTION .................................................................. 119NETWORKSETTINGS ........................................................................................ 120TOOLS ................................................................................................................. 136

6. ConnectingtoOtherEquipment ..................................................................... 141Mountingalens(soldseparately)..............................................................................141

Mountingthelens.................................................................................................141Removingthelens................................................................................................142

MakingConnections .................................................................................................. 143AnalogRGBsignalconnection.............................................................................143DigitalRGBsignalconnection..............................................................................144ConnectinganExternalMonitor .......................................................................... 146ConnectingYourDVDPlayerorOtherAVEquipment .......................................... 147ConnectingComponentInput .............................................................................. 148ConnectingHDMIInput........................................................................................ 149ConnectingtoaWiredLAN ................................................................................. 150ConnectingtoaWirelessLAN(soldseparately)..................................................151MountingawirelessLANunit...............................................................................151ToremovethewirelessLANunit..........................................................................153

ix

Table of Contents

7. Maintenance .................................................................................................... 1551CleaningtheFilters.................................................................................................... 155CleaningtheLens...................................................................................................... 158CleaningtheCabinet ................................................................................................. 158ReplacingtheLampandtheFilters ........................................................................... 159

8. User Supportware ......................................................................................... 164InstallingSoftwareProgram ...................................................................................... 164

InstallationforWindowssoftware ......................................................................... 164InstallationforMacintoshsoftware ....................................................................... 166

OperatingtheProjectorViatheLAN(VirtualRemoteTool) ...................................... 167ProjectingYourComputer’sScreenImagefromtheProjectoroveraLAN(Image

ExpressUtilityLite) .............................................................................................. 170ProjectinganImagefromanAngle(GeometricCorrectionToolinImageExpress

UtilityLite) ............................................................................................................ 172WhatyoucandowithGCT .................................................................................. 172

ProjectingImagesorVideosfromtheProjectoroveraLAN(ImageExpressUtility2.0) ....................................................................................................................... 174WhatyoucandowithImageExpressUtility2.0 .................................................. 174ConnectingtheprojectortoaLAN ....................................................................... 175BasicOperationofImageExpressUtility2.0 ....................................................... 176

UsingtheProjectortoOperateYourComputeroveraLAN(DesktopControlUtility1.0) ....................................................................................................................... 185WhatyoucandowithDesktopControlUtility1.0 ................................................ 185ConnectingtheprojectortoaLAN ....................................................................... 185Usingtheprojectortooperateyourcomputer’sdesktopscreen .......................... 186

ControllingtheProjectoroveraLAN(PCControlUtilityPro4) ....................................194ConvertingPowerPointfilestoSlides(ViewerPPTConverter3.0) ........................... 195ProjectingYourMac’sScreenImagefromtheProjectoroveraLAN(Image

ExpressUtility2forMac) ..................................................................................... 197WhatyoucandowithImageExpressUtility2 ..................................................... 197Operatingenvironment ........................................................................................ 197ConnectingtheprojectortoaLAN ....................................................................... 197UsingImageExpressUtility2 .............................................................................. 198

9. Appendix ............................................................................................................. 201Throwdistanceandscreensize.................................................................................201

Lenstypesandthrowdistance.............................................................................201Tablesofscreensizesanddimensions................................................................204Lensshiftingrange...............................................................................................205

CompatibleInputSignalList ...................................................................................... 207Specifications ............................................................................................................ 209CabinetDimensions .................................................................................................. 211Mountingthecablecover(soldseparately)................................................................212PinAssignmentsofD-SubCOMPUTERInputConnector ........................................ 213Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................... 214

IndicatorMessages .............................................................................................. 214

x

Table of Contents

CommonProblems&Solutions ........................................................................... 216Ifthereisnopicture,orthepictureisnotdisplayedcorrectly. .............................. 218

PCControlCodesandCableConnection ................................................................. 219TroubleshootingCheckList ........................................................................................ 220TravelCareGuide ....................................................................................................... 222

1

Projector

1. Introduction1 What’s in the Box?Makesureyourboxcontainseverythinglisted.Ifanypiecesaremissing,contactyourdealer.Pleasesavetheoriginalboxandpackingmaterialsifyoueverneedtoshipyourprojector.

Power cord(US: 7N080236)(EU: 7N080022)

Lens theft prevention screw (24V00841)This screw makes it difficult to remove the lens mounted on the projector. (→ page 142)

Straps (24J23901) (for preventing lamp and filter covers from falling) (x2)Attaching the straps to the lamp and filter covers prevents them from falling when the projector is suspended from the ceiling.

Computer cable (VGA)(7N520073)

NEC Projector CD-ROMUser’s manual (PDF) and the utility software(7N951591)

For North America onlyRegistrationcardLimitedwarranty

For customers in Europe: YouwillfindourcurrentvalidGuar-anteePolicyonourWebSite:www.nec-display-solutions.com

• ImportantInfomation(ForNorthAmerica:7N8N1551) (For Other countries than North America: 7N8N1551 and 7N8N1561)

• QuickSetupGuide(ForNorthAmerica:7N8N1571) (For Other countries than North America: 7N8N1571 and 7N8N1581)

Remote control(7N900961)

AA alkaline batteries (x2)

Dust cap for lens* The projector is shipped without a

lens. For the types of lens and throw distances, see page 201.

2

1. Introduction

Introduction to the ProjectorThissectionintroducesyoutoyournewprojectoranddescribesthefeaturesandcontrols.

Congratulations on Your Purchase of the ProjectorThisprojectorisoneoftheverybestprojectorsavailabletoday.Theprojectorenablesyoutoprojectpreciseimagesupto500inchesacross(measureddiagonally)fromyourPCorMacintoshcomputer(desktopornotebook),VCR,DVDplayer,ordocumentcamera.Youcanusetheprojectoronatabletoporcart,youcanusetheprojectortoprojectimagesfrombehindthescreen,andtheprojectorcanbepermanentlymountedonaceiling*1.Theremotecontrolcanbeusedwirelessly.

*1 Donotattempttomounttheprojectoronaceilingyourself.

Theprojectormustbeinstalledbyqualifiedtechniciansinordertoensureproperoperationandreducetheriskofbodilyinjury.

Inaddition,theceilingmustbestrongenoughtosupporttheprojectorandtheinstallationmustbeinaccordancewithanylocalbuildingcodes.Pleaseconsultyourdealerformoreinformation.

Features you’ll enjoy:

• Liquidcrystaltypehighbrightness/highresolutionprojector

Model LCDpanel Resolution AspectRatioPA600X 0.79"(withMLA) 1024×768dots 4:3PA500X 0.79"(withMLA) 1024×768dots 4:3PA550W 0.75"(withMLA) 1280×800dots 16:10PA500U 0.76"(withMLA) 1920×1200dots 16:10

ThePA600X/PA500X/PA550Wprojectorscover inputsignalsup toWUXGA(1920×1200dots) thanks to theAdvancedAccuBlendfunction.

• Widerangeofoptionallensesselectableaccordingtotheplaceofinstallation

Thisprojectorsupports5typesofoptionallenses,providingaselectionoflensesadaptedtoavarietyofplacesofinstallationandprojectionmethods.

Inaddition,thelensescanbemountedandremovedinonetouch.

Notethatnolensismounteduponshipmentfromthefactory.Pleasepurchaseoptionallensesseparately.

• Lensshiftfunctionforeasilyadjustingthepositionoftheprojectedimage

Thepositionoftheprojectedimageismovedbyturningthetwodialsontheprojector’sfront,onefortheverticaldirection,oneforthehorizontaldirection.

• 360°installationangle(tilt-free)

Theprojectorcanbeinstalledatanyangle(360°).

Note,however,thatthe“fanmode”settingmustbechangedaccordingtotheangleofinstallation.

Also,theprojectorcannotbeinstalledtiltedtotheleftorright.

• Widerangeofinput/outputconnectors(HDMI,DisplayPort,BNC,etc.)andbuilt-inmonauralspeaker

The projector is equipped with a variety of input/output connectors: computer (analog), 5-core BNC, HDMI,DisplayPort,Video,S-Video,etc.(Thecomputer(analog)andBNCconnectorsalsosupportcomponentinputs.)

Theprojector’sHDMIandDisplayPortinputconnectorssupportHDCP.

Theprojectorisalsoequippedwithabuilt-in10Wmonauralspeaker.

• Highpicturequalityprocessingcircuit

IDTHQVprocessingtechnologyisusedtoprojecthighqualityimages.

• Energy-savingdesignwithastandbypowerconsumptionof0.2watts

Whentheon-screenmenu’sstandbymodeissetto“PowerSaving”,thepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodeis0.2watts.

3

1. Introduction

• “Ecomode”forlowpowerconsumptionand“CarbonMeter”display

Theprojector is equippedwith an“ecomode” for reducingpower consumptionduringuse.Furthermore, thepower-savingeffectwhentheecomodeissetisconvertedintotheamountofreductionsofCO2emissionsandthisisindicatedontheconfirmationmessagedisplayedwhenthepoweristurnedoffandat“Information”ontheon-screenmenu(CARBONMETER).

• Maximumlampreplacementtimeof4000hours(3000hoursinNormalmode)andnoneedtocleanthefilters

Whenusedintheecomode,thelampreplacementtime*isextendedtoamaximumof4000hours.

*Thistimeisnotguaranteed.

Furthermore,thisprojectoruseslarge2-layerfilters.Whenthesefiltersarereplacedwithnewoneswhenchangingthelamp,thereisnoneedforregularfiltercleaning.

• Seamlessswitchfunctionforsmootherscreenchangeswhenswitchingthesignal(PA500Uonly)

Whentheinputconnectorisswitched,theimagedisplayedbeforeswitchingisheldsothatthatthenewimagecanbeswitchedtowithoutabreakduetoabsenceofasignal.

• Simultaneousdisplayof2images(PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE)

Twoimagescanbeprojectedsimultaneouslywithasingleprojector.

Therearetwotypesoflayoutsforthetwoimages:“picture-in-picture”inwhichasub-pictureisdisplayedonthemainpicture,and“picture-by-picture”inwhichthemainandsubpicturesaredisplayednexttoeachother.

• Securityfunctionforpreventingunauthorizeduse

Thisprojectorisequippedwiththefollowingsecurityfunctions:

- Passwordsecurity:Whenapasswordissetintheon-screenmenu,ascreentoinputthepasswordappearswhentheprojector’spoweristurnedon.

- Theftpreventionlock:AsecuritycablecompatiblewithKensingtonlockscanbeconnectedtotheprojector.

- Securitybar:Theprojectorhasamechanismallowingaregularsecuritycable(orwire)tobeinstalled.

• Wired/wirelessLANcompatibility(wirelessLANunitsoldseparately)

TheprojectorisequippedwithaLANport(RJ-45)forconnectiontoawiredLANfortransferringimagesfromacomputertotheprojector,controllingtheprojectorfromacomputer,etc.

Furthermore, theprojectorcanbeused inawirelessLANbymountingtheseparatelysoldwirelessLANunit(NP02LM).

• Convenientutilitysoftware(UserSupportware)providedasstandard

Sevenutilitysoftwareprograms(VirtualRemoteTool,ImageExpressUtilityLite,ImageExpressUtility2.0,DesktopControlUtility1.0,PCControlUtilityPro4,ViewerPPTConverter3.0,ImageExpressUtility2forMac)areprovidedontheincludedNECProjectorCD-ROM.

• LAN-compatibleviewerfunction

StillandmovingimagesinsharedfoldersonacomputerconnectedbywiredorwirelessLANcanbeprojectedwiththeprojector’sviewer.

- TheviewersupportstheWindowsMediaPlayer11’s“mediasharing”function.

• CrestronRoomView®compatibility

TheprojectorsupportsCrestronRoomView®,allowingmultipledevicesconnectedinthenetworktobemanagedandcontrolledfromacomputer.

About this user’s manualThefastestwaytogetstartedistotakeyourtimeanddoeverythingrightthefirsttime.Takeafewminutesnowtoreviewtheuser’smanual.Thismaysaveyoutimelateron.Atthebeginningofeachsectionofthemanualyou’llfindanoverview.Ifthesectiondoesn’tapply,youcanskipit.

4

1. Introduction

Part Names of the ProjectorFront/TopThelensissoldseparately.ThedescriptionbelowisforwhentheNP13ZLlensismounted.

Control Panel(→ page 6)

Lens Shift Dial (vertical/horizontal)(→ page 18)

Lens

Remote Sensor (located on the front and the rear)(→ page 9)

Remote Sensor(→ page 9)

Zoom Lever/Zoom Ring (→ page 21)

Lens Cap(The optional lens is shipped with the lens cap.)

Focus Ring(→ page 19)

Adjustable Tilt Foot (→ page 21)

Indicator Section(→ page 6)

Lens Release Button(→ page 142)

Adjustable Tilt Foot(→ page 21)

Ventilation (outlet)Heated air is exhausted from here.

Mountingthestraps1. Mount the straps to the filter cover and lamp cover as shown on the diagram below.

2. Insert the knot in the strap into the hole on the bottom of the projector and pull in the direction of the arrow to fasten.

1 2

Lamp Cover (→ page 160)

Security Bar Attach an anti-theft device.

The security bar accepts security wires or chains up to 0.18 inch/4.6

mm in diameter.

Monaural Speaker (10 W)

Lamp cover strap insertion hole Filter cover strap insertion hole

5

1. Introduction

Terminal Panel(→ page 7)

RearRemote Sensor (located on the front and the rear)(→ page 9)

AC InputConnect the supplied power cord’s three-pin plug here, and plug the other end into an active wall outlet. (→ page 13)

* ThissecurityslotsupportstheMicroSaver®SecuritySystem.

Built-in Security Slot ( )*

Cable cover connection (right and left)

Screw holes and grooves for the optional cable cover

(→ page 212)

Ventilation (inlet) / Filter CoverThe wireless LAN unit’s USB (LAN)

port is located inside here.(→ page 151, 155)

Ventilation (outlet)Heated air is exhausted from here.

6

1. Introduction

Control Panel/Indicator Section

1. (POWER)Button(→page14, 25)

2. POWER Indicator (→page13, 14, 25, 214)

3. STATUSIndicator(→page214)

4. LAMPIndicator(→page159, 215)

5. TEMP.Indicator(→page215)

6. SOURCEButton(→page16)

7. AUTO ADJ. Button (→page24)

8. 3DREFORMButton(→page32)

9. MENU Button (→page82)

10./VolumeButtons (→page24)

11. ENTER Button (→page82)

12. EXIT Button (→page82)

1

11

910

12

6 7 82 3 4 5

7

1. Introduction

Terminal Panel Features

1. COMPUTER1IN/ComponentInputConnector(MiniD-Sub15Pin)(→page13, 143, 148)

2. COMPUTER1AUDIOINMiniJack(StereoMini)(→page143, 148)

3. COMPUTER2IN/ComponentInputConnector(MiniD-Sub15Pin)(→page143, 148)

4. COMPUTER2AUDIOINMiniJack(StereoMini)(→page145)

5. COMPUTER3IN/Component(R/Cr,G/Y,B/Cb,H,V)Connectors(BNC×5)(→page143, 148)

6. COMPUTER3AUDIOINMiniJack(StereoMini)(→page143, 148)

7. HDMIINConnector(TypeA)(→page144, 145, 149)

8. DisplayPort IN Connector (→page144)

9. MONITOROUT(COMP.1)Connector(MiniD-Sub15Pin)(→page146)

10.AUDIOOUTMiniJack(StereoMini)(→page146)

11.S-VIDEOINConnector(MiniDIN4Pin)(→page147)12.VIDEOINConnector(RCA)(→page147)

13.VIDEO/S-VIDEOAUDIOINL/MONO,R(RCA)(→page147)

14.LANPort(RJ-45)(→page150)

15.USBPort(TypeA)(→page60)

16.PCCONTROLPort(D-Sub9Pin)(→page219) UsethisporttoconnectaPCorcontrolsystem.Thisenablesyoutocontroltheprojectorusingserialcommunica-

tionprotocol.Ifyouarewritingyourownprogram,typicalPCcontrolcodesareonpage219.

17.REMOTEConnector(StereoMini) UsethisconnectorforwiredremotecontroloftheprojectorusingtheNECoptionalremotecontrol. Connecttheprojectorandoptionalremotecontrolusingacommerciallyavailablewiredremotecontrolcable.NOTE: When a remote control cable is connected to the REMOTE connector, infrared remote control operations cannot be performed.

14 7 8 15 1 2 3 4

5109131211

1617

6

8

1. Introduction

Part Names of the Remote Control

1. Infrared Transmitter (→page9)

2. POWER ON Button (→page14)

3. POWEROFFButton (→page25)

4,5,6.COMPUTER1/2/3Button (→page16)7. AUTO ADJ. Button (→page24)

8. VIDEOButton (→page16)

9. S-VIDEOButton (→page16)

10.HDMIButton(→page16)

11. DisplayPort Button (→page16)

12.VIEWERButton(→page16, 60)

13.NETWORKButton(→page16)

14.SOURCEButton(→page16)

15.PIPButton(→page16, 35)

16.IDSETButton(→page107)17.NumericKeypadButton/CLEARButton (→page107)

18. MENU Button (→page82)19. EXIT Button (→page82)

20. Button (→page82)

21. ENTER Button (→page82)

22.L-CLICKButton*(→page31)23.R-CLICKButton*(→page31)24.VOLUME(+)(−)Button(→page24)25.D-ZOOM(+)(−)Button(→page27)26.PAGE/Button*(→page31)27. PICTURE Button (→page91, 93)28. ECO Button (→page28)

29. ASPECT Button (→page96)30.AV-MUTEButton(→page27)31.3DREFORMButton(→page32)32.FREEZEButton(→page27)33.SHUTTERButton (notavailableonthisseriesofprojectors)

34.LENSSHIFTButton (notavailableonthisseriesofprojectors)

35.FOCUS/ZOOMButton (notavailableonthisseriesofprojectors)

36.HELPButton(→page112)

* ThePAGE/, ,L-CLICKandR-CLICKbuttonsworkonlywhenaUSBcableisconnectedwithyourcom-puter..

1

35489

1213

26711101514

17

16

18

22

24

252728

21

19

20

23

26

29

30

3334

32313635

9

1. Introduction

Remote Control Precautions• Handletheremotecontrolcarefully.• Iftheremotecontrolgetswet,wipeitdryimmediately.• Avoidexcessiveheatandhumidity.• Donotshort,heat,ortakeapartbatteries.• Donotthrowbatteriesintofire.• Ifyouwillnotbeusingtheremotecontrolforalongtime,removethebatteries.• Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polarity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.• Donotusenewandoldbatteriestogether,orusedifferenttypesofbatteriestogether.• Disposeofusedbatteriesaccordingtoyourlocalregulations.

Operating Range for Wireless Remote Control

• Theinfraredsignaloperatesbyline-of-sightuptoadistanceofabout22feet/7mandwithina60-degreeangleoftheremotesensorontheprojectorcabinet.

• Theprojectorwillnotrespondifthereareobjectsbetweentheremotecontrolandthesensor,orifstronglightfallsonthesensor.Weakbatterieswillalsopreventtheremotecontrolfromproperlyoperatingtheprojector.

Battery Installation

7 m/22 feet7 m/22 feet

7 m/22 feet

7 m/22 feet

Remote control

Remote sensor on projector cabinet

Remote control

1 Pressthecatchandremovethebatterycover.

2 Install new ones (AA). Ensurethatyouhavethebatteries’polar-ity(+/−)alignedcorrectly.

3 Slipthecoverbackoverthebatteriesuntilitsnapsintoplace.NOTE: Do not mix different types of batteries or new and old batteries.

1

2 12

10

1. Introduction

Operating Environment for Software Included on CD-ROMNamesandFeaturesofBundledSoftwarePrograms

Nameofsoftwareprogram FeaturesVirtualRemoteTool Whenthecomputerandprojectorareconnectedusinganetwork(wired/wireless

LAN),suchoperationsasturningtheprojector’spoweronandoffandswitchingthesignalcanbeperformed.Itisalsopossibletosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthebackgroundlogo.Oncetheimageisregistered,itcanbelockedtopreventthelogofrombeingoverwritten.(→page167)

ImageExpressUtilityLite • When the computer andprojector are connectedusinganetwork (wired/wirelessLAN),thecomputerscreencanbesenttotheprojectorandprojected.Thereisnoneedforacomputercable.(→page150,page170)

• ThissoftwareprogramcanbeusedtocontrolthepowerON/OFFandsourceselectionoftheprojectorfromyourcomputer.

• TheGeometricCorrectionTool(GCT)functionallowsyoutocorrectdistortionofimagesprojectedonacurvedwall.(→page172)

ImageExpressUtility2.0 • Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtosendthescreensofyourpersonalcomput-erstotheprojectorviawired/wirelessLAN(Meetingmode).

Projectedimagescanbetransferredandsavedtopersonalcomputers. When“MeetingMode”isused,projectedimagescanbesentandsavedto

thepersonalcomputers.Imagescanbesentfromapersonalcomputertonotonlyoneprojectorbutalsototwoormoreprojectorsatthesametime.(→page174)

DesktopControlUtility1.0 • Thisisasoftwareprogramusedtooperatethedesktopscreenofapersonalcomputerataremotelocationbyusingaprojectorviawired/wirelessLAN.(→page185)

PCControlUtilityPro4 ThisisasoftwareprogramusedtooperatetheprojectorfromthecomputerwhenthecomputerandtheprojectorareconnectedwithLAN(wiredorwireless)oraserialcable.(→page194)

ViewerPPTConverter3.0 ThisisasoftwareprogramusedtoconvertfilescreatedwithPowerPointintoJPEGfilesthatcanbedisplayedwiththeviewerfunctionoftheprojectorwhenaUSBmemorydeviceisinsertedintotheprojector.(→page195)

ImageExpressUtilityforMac • ThisisasoftwareprogramusedtosendtheMac’sscreenimagetotheprojec-toroveranetwork(wiredorwirelessLAN).(→page197)ForMac’soperatingenvironment,seepage197.

*AseparatelysoldwirelessLANunitisrequiredtouseawirelessLAN.

NOTE:• ImageExpressUtilityLiteandImageExpressUtilityforMacdonotsupport“MeetingMode”whichisprovidedinImageExpressUtility2.0.

DownloadserviceFortheupdateinformationaboutthesesoftwareprograms,visitourwebsite:URL:http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/index.html

11

1. Introduction

Operating EnvironmentThefollowingistheoperatingenvironmentforImageExpressUtilityLite.Fortheoperatingenvironmentofothersoft-wareprogram,refertothehelpfunctionofeachsoftwareprogram.

SupportedOS Windows7HomeBasicWindows7HomePremiumWindows7ProfessionalWindows7UltimateWindows7EnterpriseWindowsVistaHomeBasicWindowsVistaHomePremiumWindowsVistaBusinessWindowsVistaUltimateWindowsVistaEnterpriseWindowsXPHomeEditionServicePack3orlaterWindowsXPProfessionalServicePack3orlater• Only32-bitversion• Windowspower-savingfunctionisnotsupported.

Processor • Windows7/WindowsVistaPentiumM1.2GHzequivalentorhigherrequiredDualcore1.5GHzorhigherrecommended

• WindowsXPPentiumM1.0GHzequivalentorhigherrequiredDualcore1.0GHzorhigherrecommended

Memory • Windows7/WindowsVista512MBormorerequired1GBormorerecommended

• WindowsXP256MBormorerequired512MBormorerecommended*Morememorymayberequiredtorunadditionalapplicationssimultaneously.

Graphicprocessor • Windows7/WindowsVistaThe“Graphics”score3.0ormoreof“WindowsExperienceIndex”recommended.

Networkenvironment TCP/IP-compatiblewiredLANorwirelessLAN(*UseawirelessLANunitcomplyingwiththeWi-Fistandard.)

Resolution • Windows7/WindowsVistaSVGA(800×600)orhigherrequiredXGA(1024×768)recommended

• WindowsXPVGA(640×480)orhigherrequiredXGA(1024×768)recommended

1024dots×768lines-1280dots×800linesrecommended(PA550W/PA500U)

ScreenColors HighColor(15bits,16bits)TrueColor(24bits,32bits)(recommended)• 256orfewercolorsarenotsupported.

12

Thissectiondescribeshowtoturnontheprojectorandtoprojectapictureontothescreen.

1 Flow of Projecting an Image

Step 1• Connectingyourcomputer/Connectingthepowercord(→ page 13)

Step 2 • Turningontheprojector(→ page 14)

Step 3 • Selectingasource(→ page 16)

Step 4• Adjustingthepicturesizeandposition(→ page 17)

• Correctingkeystonedistortion[KEYSTONE](→ page 22)

Step 5• Adjustingapictureandsound

- Optimizing a computer signal automatically (→ page 24)

- Turning up or down volume (→ page 24)

Step 6• Makingapresentation

Step 7• Turningofftheprojector(→ page 25)

Step 8• Afteruse(→ page 26)

2. Projecting an Image (Basic Operation)

13


Connecting Your Computer/Connecting the Power Cord

1. Connectyourcomputertotheprojector.

This section will show you a basic connection to a computer. For information about other connections, see “(2) Making Connections” on page 143.

Connect the computer cable (VGA) between the projector’s COMPUTER 1 IN connector and the computer’s port (mini D-Sub 15 Pin). Turn two thumb screws of both connectors to fix the computer cable (VGA).

2. Connectthesuppliedpowercordtotheprojector.

First connect the supplied power cord’s three-pin plug to the AC IN of the projector, and then connect the other plug of the supplied power cord in the wall outlet.

The projector’s power indicator will light orange* (standby mode).

The STATUS indicator will also light green*.

* This will apply for both indicators when [NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE]. See the Power Indicator section.(→ page 214)

COMPUTER 1 IN

Make sure that the prongs are fully inserted into both the AC IN and the wall outlet.

To wall outlet

CAUTION:PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.

14


Standby Blinking Power On

Steady orange light Blinking blue light Steady blue light

Turning on the Projector

1. Remove the lens cap.

2. Press the (POWER) button on the projector cabinet or the POWER ON button on the remote control.

The POWER indicator will turn to blue and the projector will become ready to use.

TIP: • Whenthemessage“PROJECTORISLOCKED!ENTERYOURPASSWORD.” is displayed, itmeans that the [SECURITY]featureisturnedon.(→page37)

• When the ECOmessage is displayed, itmeans that [ON] isselectedfor[ECOMESSAGE].(→page102)

• PressingbuttonssuchaspowerbuttonandMENUbuttonwillmakesound.Toturnoffthebeepsound,select[OFF]for[BEEP]fromthemenu.(→page109)

After you turn on your projector, ensure that the computer or video source is turned on.

NOTE:Abluescreen(bluebackground)isdisplayedwhennosignalisbeinginput(byfactorydefaultmenusettings).

(→ page 214)

15


Note on Startup screen (Menu Language Select screen)Whenyoufirstturnontheprojector,youwillgettheStartupmenu.Thismenugivesyoutheopportunitytoselectoneofthe27menulanguages.

Toselectamenulanguage,followthesesteps:

1. Use the , , or button to select one of the 27 languages from the menu.

2. PresstheENTERbuttontoexecutetheselection.

After this has been done, you can proceed to the menuoperation.Ifyouwant,youcanselectthemenulanguagelater.(→[LANGUAGE]onpage85 and 101)

NOTE: • Turningthepowerbackondirectlyafter it isturnedoff(bydirectpoweroff)whileanimageisbeingprojectedcanresult inmalfunction.Besuretowaitatleast1secondbeforeturningthepowerbackon.

• Keepthelenscapoffthelenswhiletheprojector’spowerison. Ifthelenscapison,itcouldbewarpedduetohightemperature.• Ifoneofthefollowingthingshappens,theprojectorwillnotturnon.- Iftheinternaltemperatureoftheprojectoristoohigh,theprojectordetectsabnormalhightemperature.Inthisconditiontheprojectorwillnotturnontoprotecttheinternalsystem.Ifthishappens,waitfortheprojector’sinternalcomponentstocooldown.

- Whenthelampreachesitsendofusablelife,theprojectorwillnotturnon.Ifthishappens,replacethelamp.- IftheSTATUSindicatorlightsorangewiththepowerbuttonpressed,itmeansthatthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon.Cancelthelockbyturningitoff.(→page106)

- Ifthelampfailstolight,andiftheSTATUSindicatorflashesonandoffinacycleofsixtimes,waitafullminuteandthenturnon the power.

• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoffbyusingthepowerbutton.• Immediatelyafterturningontheprojector,screenflickermayoccur.Thisisnormal.Wait3to5minutesuntilthelamplightingis

stabilized.• Whentheprojectoristurnedon,itmaytakesometimebeforethelamplightbecomesbright.• Ifyouturnontheprojectorimmediatelyafterthelampisturnedofforwhenthetemperatureishigh,thefansrunwithoutdisplay-inganimageforsometimeandthentheprojectorwilldisplaytheimage.

16


Selecting a SourceSelecting the computer or video sourceNOTE:Turnonthecomputerorvideosourceequipmentconnectedtotheprojector.

DetectingtheSignalAutomaticallyPresstheSOURCEbuttononce.Theprojectorwillsearchfortheavailableinputsourceanddisplayit.Theinputsourcewillchangeasfollows:

COMPUTER1→COMPUTER2→COMPUTER3→HDMI→DisplayPort→VIDEO→S-VIDEO→VIEWER→COMPUTER1→ ...

• WiththeSOURCEscreendisplayed,youcanpresstheSOURCEbuttonafewtimestoselecttheinputsource.

TIP:Ifnoinputsignalispresent,theinputwillbeskipped.

UsingtheRemoteControlPressanyoneoftheCOMPUTER1,COMPUTER2,COMPUTER3,HDMI,DisplayPort,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,VIEWER,orNETWORKbuttons.

SelectingDefaultSourceYoucansetasourceasthedefaultsourcesothatitwillbedisplayedeachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.

1. PresstheMENUbutton.

The menu will be displayed.

2. Press the buttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthe but-tonortheENTERbuttontoselect[BASIC].

3. Press the buttonfivetimestoselect[OPTIONS(2)].

4. Press the button five times to select [DEFAULT SOURCESELECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The [DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT] screen will be displayed.

(→ page 111)

5. Selectasourceasthedefaultsource,andpresstheENTERbut-ton.

6. PresstheEXITbuttonafewtimestoclosethemenu.

7. Restart the projector.

The source you selected in step 5 will be projected.

NOTE:Evenwhen[AUTO]isturnedon,the[NETWORK]willnotbeautomaticallyselected.Tosetyournetworkasthedefaultsource,select[NETWORK].

TIP:• Whentheprojector is inStandbymode,applyingacomputersignal fromacomputerconnectedtotheCOMPUTER1INinputwillpowerontheprojectorandsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage.

([AUTOPOWERON(COMP1/3)]→page111)• OntheWindows7keyboard,acombinationoftheWindowsandPkeysallowsyoutosetupexternaldisplayeasilyandquickly.

17


Adjusting the Picture Size and PositionUsethelensshiftdial,theadjustabletiltfootlever,thezoomlever/zoomringandthefocusringtoadjustthepicturesizeandposition.In this chapter drawings and cables are omitted for clarity.

Adjustingtheprojectedimage’sverticalandhorizontalposition[Lensshift]

Adjustingthefocus[Focusring]

Finelyadjustingthesizeofanimage[Zoomlever/Zoomring]

Adjusting theprojected image’sheightandhorizontaltilt[Tiltfoot]*¹

Adjustingthekeystonecorrection[Keystone]

NOTE*1: Adjusttheprojectedimage’sheightusingthetiltfeetwhenyouwanttoprojecttheimageatapositionhigherthanthelensshiftadjustmentrange.

(→ page 18)

(→ page 21)

(→ page 19)

(→ page 21)

(→ page 22)

18


Adjusting the vertical position of a projected image (Lens shift)

CAUTION Performtheadjustmentfrombehindorfromthesideoftheprojector.Adjustingfromthefrontcouldexposeyoureyestostronglightwhichcouldinjurethem.

Turnthelensshiftdialsclockwiseorcounterclockwise.

VerticaldialTurnthisclockwiseorcounterclockwisetoadjusttheprojectionpositionintheverticaldirection.Approximateturningrange:About6turnscounterclockwise,about2turnsclockwisewhenthelensisatthecenterposition.

HorizontaldialTurnthisclockwiseorcounterclockwisetoadjusttheprojectionpositioninthehorizontaldirection.Approximateturningrange:About1 turncounterclockwise,about1 turnclockwisewhenthe lens isat thecenterposition.

NOTE:• Thedialscanbeturnedmorethanonefullturn,buttheprojectionpositioncannotbemovedmorethantherangeindicatedonthefollowingpage.

• Ifthelensisshiftedtothemaximuminthediagonaldirection,theedgesofthescreenwillbedarkorshaded.• ThelensshiftfunctioncannotbeusedwhenusingtheseparatelysoldNP11FLlens.

Downward

Upward

Lens shift dial (Horizontal)

Lens shift dial (Vertical)

RightwardLeftward

19


TIP:• ThediagrambelowshowsthelensshiftadjustmentrangeforthePA600XandPA500X(projectionmode:desktopfront).Toraisetheprojectionpositionhigherthanthis,usethetiltfeet.(→ page 21)

• ForthePA550W/PA500Uandtheceilingmount/frontprojectionlensshiftadjustmentrange,seepage205, 206.

1V

1H

0.5V

0.1V 0.1H 0.1H

PA600X/PA500X

0.3H*¹ 0.3H*¹

Vertical shift range (0 to 0.5V)

Height of projected image

NOTE*1:Horizontallensshiftrangeis0.15Hat150"projectedimagewiththelensNP13ZL

FocusApplicablelens:NP12ZL/NP13ZL/NP14ZL/NP15ZLUsetheFOCUSringtoobtainthebestfocus.

Focus ring

20


Applicable lens: NP11FLWiththeNP11FLlens,adjustthefocusandpicturedistortion.Preparations:Turnthelensshiftdials(verticalandhorizontal)ontheprojectortoreturnthelensshifttothecenter.Approximatelenscenterposition(explainedhereforthedesktopfrontprojectionmode)

Horizontaldial: Firstturnthedialtotheleftedge,thenturnitfurthersothattheknobishorizontal.Fromthisposition,turnthedial1fullturnclockwise.

Verticaldial: Firstturnthedialtothebottomedge,thenturnitfurthersothattheknobishorizontal. Fromthisposition,turnthedial2fullturnscounterclockwise.

1.Turnthedistortionringtotheleftedge.

2. Turn the focus leverclockwiseandcounterclockwise toadjust the focus at the center of the screen.

3. Use the distortion ring to correct the screen’s distortion.

(This also brings the edges of the screen into focus.)

4. Use the focus lever to adjust the screen’s overall focus.

* If the focus at the center of the screen is off, turn the distortion ring a little counterclockwise. The focus at the center of the screen can now be adjusted with the focus lever.

Distortion ring

Lens shift dials

Focus lever

21


Adjusting the Tilt Feet1. Turntheleftandrighttiltfeettoadjust.

Thetiltfeetlengthenandshortenwhenturned.

Theheightoftheprojectedimageisadjustedbyturningtheleftand right tilt feet.

If the projected image is tilted, turn one of the tilt feet to adjust the image so that it is level.

- If the projected image is distorted, see “2-6 Correcting Keystone Distortion” (→ page 22).

- The tilt feet can be lengthened by a maximum of 20 mm.

- The tilt feet can be used to tilt the projector by a maximum of 4º.

NOTE:• Donotlengthenthetiltfeetanymorethan20mm/0.8".Doingsowillmakethetiltfeet’smountsectionunstableandcouldcausethetiltfeettocomeofftheprojector.

• Donotuse the tilt feet foranypurposeother thanadjusting theprojector’sprojectionangle.

Handlingthetiltfeetimproperly,suchascarryingtheprojectorbygraspingthetiltfeetorhookingitontoawallusingthetiltfeet,coulddamagetheprojector.

ZoomTurnthezoomleverorzoomringclockwiseandcounterclockwise.- TheseparatelysoldNP11FLlensdoesnothaveazoomring.

Zoom ring

Up

Tilt foot

Down

22


Correcting Keystone DistortionWhentheprojectorisnotexactlyperpendiculartothescreen,keystonedistortionoccurs.Toovercomeit,youcanusethe“Keystone”function,adigitaltechnologythatcanadjustforkeystone-typedistortion,resultinginacrisp,squareimage.Thefollowingprocedureexplainshowtousethe[KEYSTONE]screenfromthemenutocorrecttrapezoidaldistor-tions.Whentheprojectorisplaceddiagonallytothescreen,Whentheprojectorissetupatanangleinrelationtothescreen,adjusttheHorizontaloptionoftheKeystonemenusothatthetopandbottomofsidesoftheprojectedimageareparallel.

1. Pressthe3DREFORMbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojec-tor cabinet.

The Keystone screen will be displayed on the screen.

2. Press the buttontoselect[VERTICAL]andthenusethe or so that the left and right sides of the projected image are parallel.

* Adjust the vertical keystone distortion.

3. Aligntheleft(orright)sideofthescreenwiththeleft(orright)sideof the projected image.

• Usetheshortersideoftheprojectedimageasthebase.

• Intherightexample,usetheleftsideasthebase.

4. Press the buttontoselect[HORIZONTAL]andthenusethe or so that the top and bottom sides of the projected image are par-allel.

• Adjustthehorizontalkeystonedistortion.

Screen frameProjected area

Align left side

23


NOTE:• Iftheprojectionangleisthesameasinthelastuse,thepreviouscorrectionsettingvaluesareretainedinthememory.• WhendoingStep2,adjustthepositionofimagesothatthescreenissmallerthantheareaoftheprojectedarea.• Toresetthe3DReformcorrectionsettingvalues,pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2seconds.• Eachtimethe3DREFORMbuttonispressed,theitemwillchangeasfollows:KEYSTONE→CORNERSTONE→ None →KEY-STONE→ ...

Forinformationon[CORNERSTONE],see“CorrectingHorizontalandVerticalKeystoneDistortion(Cornerstone)”onpage32.• TheCornerstoneadjustmentwillnotbeavailableduringtheKeystoneadjustment.ToperformtheCornerstoneadjustment,pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2secondstoresettheKeystonecorrectionsettingvalues.TheKeystoneadjustmentwillnotbeavailableduringtheCornerstoneadjustment.ToperformtheKeystoneadjustment,pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2secondstoresettheCornerstonecorrectionsettingvalues.

• The3DReformfeaturecancauseanimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.

5. Repeatsteps2and4tocorrectkeystonedistortion.

6. AftercompletingKeystonecorrection,presstheEXITbutton.

The Keystone screen will disappear.

• ToperformKeystonecorrectionagain,pressthe3DREFORMbuttonto display the Keystone screen and repeat above steps 1 to 6.

24


Optimizing Computer Signal AutomaticallyAdjusting the Image Using Auto AdjustOptimizingacomputerimageautomatically.(COMPUTER1/COMPUTER2/COMPUTER3)PresstheAUTOADJ.buttontooptimizeacomputerimageautomatically.Thisadjustmentmaybenecessarywhenyouconnectyourcomputerforthefirsttime.

[Poor picture]

[Normal picture]

NOTE:Somesignalsmaytaketimetodisplayormaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.• IftheAutoAdjustoperationcannotoptimizethecomputersignal,trytoadjust[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],and[PHASE]manually.(→page94, 95)

Turning Up or Down VolumeSoundlevelfromthespeakercanbeadjusted.

TIP:Whennomenusappear,the and buttonsontheprojectorcabinetworkasavolumecontrol.

NOTE:• Volumecontrolisnotavailablewiththe or buttonwhenanimageisenlargedbyusingtheD-ZOOM(+)buttonorwhenthemenuisdisplayed.

• Volumecontrolisnotavailablewiththe or buttonwhenVIEWERorNET-WORKisused.

Increase volume

Decrease volume

25


Turning off the Projector

Toturnofftheprojector:1. First,press the (POWER)buttonon theprojector

cabinetorthePOWEROFFbuttonontheremotecon-trol.

The [POWER OFF / ARE YOU SURE ? / CARBON SAV-INGS- SESSION 0.000[g-CO2]] message will appear.

2. Secondly, press the ENTER button or press the (POWER)orthePOWEROFFbuttonagain.

The lamp will turn off and the projector will go into standby mode. When in standby mode, the POWER indicator will light orange and the STATUS indicator will light green when [NORMAL] is selected for [STANDBY MODE].

PowerOn

Steady blue light

Standby

Steady orange lightPress twice

CAUTION:PartsoftheprojectormaybecometemporarilyheatediftheprojectoristurnedoffwiththePOWERbuttonoriftheACpowersupplyisdisconnectedduringnormalprojectoroperation.Usecautionwhenpickinguptheprojector.

NOTE:• WhilethePOWERindicatorisblinkingblueinshortcycles,thepowercannotbeturnedoff.• Youcannotturnoffthepowerfor60secondsimmediatelyafterturningitonanddisplayinganimage.• Waitatleast20minutesafterthepoweristurnedon(afterstartingtoproject)beforeturningtheACpoweroffwhileanimageisbeingprojectedorwhilethecoolingfanisrunning.

• Donotunplugthepowercordfromtheprojectororfromthepoweroutletwhileanimageisbeingprojected.Doingsocoulddeterioratetheprojector’sACinputconnectororthepowerplug’scontact.ToturnofftheACpowerwhileanimageisbeingprojected,usetheprojector’smainpowerswitch,thepowerstrip’sswitch,thebreaker,etc.

• DonotdisconnecttheACpowersupplytotheprojectorwithin10secondsofmakingadjustmentorsettingchangesandclosingthemenu.Doingsocancauselossofadjustmentsandsettings.

26


After UsePreparation:Makesurethattheprojectoristurnedoff.

1. Unplug the power cord.

2. Disconnectanyothercables.• RemovetheUSBmemoryifitisinsertedintotheprojector.

3. Mount the lens cap on the lens.

4. Beforemovingtheprojector,screwinthetiltfeetiftheyhavebeenlengthened.

27

1 Turning off the Image and SoundPresstheAV-MUTEbuttontoturnofftheimage,sound,beepsoundforashortperiodoftime.Pressagaintorestoretheimageandsound.

Theprojector’spower-savingfunctionwillwork10secondsaftertheimageisturnedoff.Asaresult,thelamppowerwillbereduced.

NOTE:• Torestoretheimage,evenifyoupresstheAV-MUTEbuttonimmediatelyafterthestartofthepower-savingfunction,thelampbrightnessmaynotberestoredtoitsoriginallevel.

Freezing a PicturePress theFREEZEbutton to freezeapicture.Pressagain to resumemotion.

NOTE:Theimageisfrozenbuttheoriginalvideoisstillplayingback.

Enlarging a PictureYoucanenlargethepictureuptofourtimes.

NOTE:Themaximummagnificationmaybelessthanfourtimesdependingonthesignal.

Todoso:

1. PresstheD-ZOOM(+)buttontomagnifythepicture.

3. Convenient Features

28


Changing Eco Mode/Checking Energy-Saving Effect Using Eco Mode [ECO MODE]Thisfeatureenablesyoutoselecttwobrightnessmodesofthelamp:OFFandONmodes.Thelamplifecanbeextendedbyturningonthe[ECOMODE].

[ECOMODE] Description

[OFF] Thisisthedefaultsetting(100%Brightness).

[ON] Lowlamppowerconsumption(approx.80%Brightness).

Toturnonthe[ECOMODE],dothefollowing:

1. PresstheECObuttonontheremotecontroltodisplay[ECOMODE]screen.

2. Use the or buttontoselect[ON].

3. PresstheENTERbutton.

To change from [ON] to [OFF], Go back to Step 2 and select [OFF]. Repeat Step 3.

NOTE: • The[ECOMODE]canbechangedbyusingthemenu. Select[SETUP]→[BASIC]→[ECOMODE].• Thelampliferemainingandlamphoursusedcanbecheckedin[USAGETIME].Select[INFO.]→[USAGETIME].• [ECOMODE]isalwayssetto[OFF]for1minuteimmediatelyafterthelampisturnedon.Thelampconditionwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[ECOMODE]ischanged.

• Afteralapseof1minutefromwhentheprojectordisplaysablue,blackorlogoscreen,[ECOMODE]willautomaticallyswitchto[ON].

• Iftheprojectorisoverheatedin[OFF]mode,theremaybeacasewherethe[ECOMODE]automaticallychangesto[ON]modetoprotecttheprojector.Thisiscalled“ForcedECOMode”.WhentheprojectorisintheForcedEcoMode,thepicturebrightnessdecreasesslightlyandtheTEMP.indicatorlightsorange.AtthesametimetheThermometersymbol[ ]isdisplayedatthebottomrightofthescreen.

Whentheprojectorcomesbacktonormaltemperature,theForcedEcoModeiscancelledandthe[ECOMODE]returnsto[OFF]mode.

2. Press the button. The area of the magnified image will be moved

3. PresstheD-ZOOM(−)button.

Each time the D-ZOOM (−) button is pressed, the image is reduced.

NOTE: • Theimagewillbeenlargedorreducedatthecenterofthescreen.• Displayingthemenuwillcancelthecurrentmagnification.

29


Checking Energy-Saving Effect [CARBON METER]Thisfeaturewillshowenergy-savingeffectintermsofCO2emissionreduction(kg)whentheprojector’s[ECOMODE]issetto[OFF],or[ON].Thisfeatureiscalledas[CARBONMETER].

Therearetwomessages:[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]and[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION].The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]messageshowsthetotalamountofCO2emissionreductionfromthetimeofshipmentuptonow.Youcanchecktheinformationon[USAGETIME]from[INFO.]ofthemenu.(→page112)

The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messageshowstheamountofCO2emissionreductionbetweenthetimeofchangingtoECOMODEimmediatelyafterthetimeofpower-onandthetimeofpower-off.The[CARBONSAVINGS-SESSION]messagewillbedisplayedinthe[POWEROFF/AREYOUSURE?]messageatthetimeofpower-off.

TIP:• TheformulaasshownbelowisusedtocalculatetheamountofCO2emissionreduction. AmountofCO2emissionreduction=(PowerconsumptioninOFFforECOMODE−PowerconsumptioninONforECOMODE)×CO2conversionfactor.*WhentheimageisturnedoffwiththeAV-MUTEbuttontheamountofCO2emmissionreductionwillalsoincrease.

*CalculationforamountofCO2emissionreductionisbasedonanOECDpublication“CO2EmissionsfromFuelCombustion,2008Edition”.

• The[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]iscalculatedbasedonsavingsrecordedin15minutesintervals.• Thisformulawillnotapplytothepowerconsumptionwhichisnotaffectedbywhether[ECOMODE]isturnedonoroff.

30


Using the Optional Remote Mouse Receiver (NP01MR)Theoptionalremotemousereceiverenablesyoutooperateyourcomputer’smousefunctionsfromtheremotecontrol.Itisagreatconvenienceforclickingthroughyourcomputer-generatedpresentations.

ConnectingtheremotemousereceivertoyourcomputerIfyouwishtousetheremotemousefunction,connectthemousereceiverandcomputer.Themousereceivercanbeconnecteddirectlytothecomputer’sUSBport(typeA).

NOTE:DependingonthetypeofconnectionorOSinstalledonyourcomputer,youmayhavetorestartyourcomputerorchangeyourcomputersettings.

Whenoperatingacomputerviatheremotemousereceiver

WhenconnectingusingtheUSBterminalForPC,themousereceivercanonlybeusedwithaWindowsXP*,WindowsVista,Windows7,orMacOSX10.0.0orlateroperatingsystem.

*NOTE:InSP1orolderversionofWindowsXP,ifthemousecursorwillnotmovecorrectly,dothefollowing:CleartheEnhancepointerprecisioncheckboxunderneaththemousespeedsliderintheMousePropertiesdialogbox[PointerOptionstab].

NOTE:ThePAGE and buttonsdonotworkwithPowerPointforMacintosh.

NOTE:Waitatleast5secondsafterdisconnectingthemousereceiverbeforereconnectingitandviceversa.Thecomputermaynotidentifythemousereceiverifitisrepeatedlyconnectedanddisconnectedinrapidintervals.

Remote mouse receiver

Computer

To USB port of PC or Macintosh

Remote sensor on the remote mouse receiver

7 m/22 feet

31


Operatingyourcomputer’smousefromtheremotecontrolYoucanoperateyourcomputer’smousefromtheremotecontrol.

PAGE/Button: scrollstheviewingareaofthewindowortomovetothepreviousornextslideinPowerPointonyourcomputer.

Buttons: movesthemousecursoronyourcomputer.L-CLICKButton: worksasthemouseleftbutton.R-CLICKButton: worksasthemouserightbutton.

NOTE:• Whenyouoperatethecomputerusingthe or buttonwiththemenudisplayed,boththemenuandthemousepointerwillbeaffected.Closethemenuandperformthemouseoperation.

• ThePAGE and buttonsdonotworkwithPowerPointforMacintosh.

AboutDragMode:BypressingtheL-CLICKorR-CLICKbuttonfor2or3secondsthenreleasing,thedragmodeissetandthedragoperationcanbeperformedsimplybypressingthebutton.Todroptheitem,presstheL-CLICK(orR-CLICK)button.Tocancelit,presstheR-CLICK(orL-CLICK)button.

TIP:YoucanchangethePointerspeedontheMousePropertiesdialogboxontheWindows.Formoreinformation,seetheuserdocumentationoronlinehelpsuppliedwithyourcomputer.

32


Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion [COR-Correcting Horizontal and Vertical Keystone Distortion [COR-NERSTONE]

Usethe3DReformfeaturetocorrectkeystone(trapezoidal)distortiontomakethetoporbottomandtheleftorrightsideofthescreenlongerorshortersothattheprojectedimageisrectangular.

Cornerstone1. Pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2secondstoresetcurrentadjustments.

Current adjustments for [KEYSTONE] or [CORNERSTONE] will be cleared.

2. Project an image so that the screen is smaller than the area of the raster.

3. Pickupanyoneofthecornersandalignthecorneroftheimagewithacornerofthescreen.

Projected image

The drawing shows the up-per right corner.

4. Pressthe3DREFORMbuttontwice.

The Cornerstone adjustment screen is displayed.

5. Use the buttontoselectoneicon()whichpointsinthedirectionyouwishtomovetheprojectedimage frame.


TIP: If you are adjusting [KEYSTONE], [CORNERSTONE]will not beavailable.Ifthishappens,pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2secondstoresetthe[KEYSTONE]adjustments.

The drawing shows the upper left icon ( ) is selected.

TIP:PA600X/PA500X:When [WIDESCREEN] is selected from [SCREENTYPE],lines that show “16:9” or “16:10”will be displayed. Click the outer corners. PA550W/P-PA500U:When[4:3SCREEN]isselectedfrom[SCREENTYPE],linesthatshow“4:3”willbedisplayed.Clicktheoutercorners.

33



10. Press the or buttontohighlightthe[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

ThiscompletestheCornerstonecorrection.Selecting[CANCEL]willreturntotheadjustmentscreenwithoutsavingchanges(Step3).Selecting[RESET]willreturntothefactorydefault.Selecting[UNDO]willexitwithoutsavingchanges.

NOTE:Toresetthe3DReformcorrectionsettingvalues,pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2seconds.

9. Use the button to select another icon which points in the direction.

On the Cornerstone adjustment screen, select [EXIT] or press the EXIT button on the remote control.

The confirmation screen is displayed.

7. Use the buttontomovetheprojectedimageframeasshownontheexample.

34


Theadjustablerangesfor3DReformareasfollows:

PA600X/PA500X/PA550W

HORIZONTAL VERTICALCORNERSTONE Max.+/−40°approx. Max.+/−30°approx.KEYSTONE

PA500U

HORIZONTAL VERTICALCORNERSTONE Max.+/−35°approx. Max.+/−30°approx.KEYSTONE

* Thefollowingareconditionsunderwhichthemaximumangleisachieved:

• WhenthelensNP13ZLisused

• Whenthelensshiftissettothecenter

Whenthelensshiftisusedandyettheimageisnotdisplayedinthecenterofthescreen,theadjustablerangewillbeincreasedordecreased.

• Imageisprojectedinmaximumwidewiththezoomring

NOTE: • Evenwhentheprojectoristurnedon,thelastusedcorrectionvaluesareapplied.• IftheCornerstonescreenisunavailable(grayed),pressandholdthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2secondstoresetthecurrentcorrectiondata.TheCornerstonefunctionbecomesavailable.

• Turningontheprojectorwillresetthepreviouscorrectionsettingvaluesandcorrectdistortionanewiftheprojectionangleischangedfromthelastuse.

Iftheprojectionangleisthesameasinthelastuse,thepreviouscorrectionsettingvaluesareretainedinthememory.• Therangeofkeystonecorrectionisnotthemaximumtiltangleofprojector.

NOTE:Using3DReformcorrectioncancausetheimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectronically.

35


Displaying Two Pictures at the Same TimeTheprojectorhasafeaturethatallowsyoutoviewtwodifferentsignalssimultaneously.Youhavetwomodes:PIPmodeandPICTUREBYPICTUREmode.

Fromthemenuyoucanselect[SETUP]→[BASIC]→[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE].

The[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]menuitemhasthefollowingthreeoptions:MODE,POSITION,andSOURCE.Usethe or buttontoselect[MODE],[POSITION]or[SOURCE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Selecting the PIP or PICTURE BY PICTURE Mode [MODE]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecttwomodes:PIPandSIDEBYSIDE.

Usethe or buttontoselect[PIP]or[PICTUREBYPICTURE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

PIP:Thisoptionallowsyoutoviewasubpictureinthemainpicture.

Main picture

Subpicture

PICTUREBYPICTURE:Thisallowsyoutoviewtwopicturessidebyside.

Main picture Sub picture

NOTE: • Themainpicturewillbedisplayedontheleftsideandthesubpictureontherightside.• ThemainpicturesignalsupportstheCOMPUTER1,COMPUTER2,andCOMPUTER3connectors. ThesubpicturesignalsupportstheVIDEOINandS-VIDEOINconnectors.• ThemainpicturesupportsanRGBsignalwitharesolutionof1280×1024pixelsorless.

36


ViewingTwoPictures

1. Press the PIP button on the remote control.

The PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE SOURCE screen will be displayed.

2. Use the or buttontoselectthesourceandpresstheENTERbutton.

The PIP screen or PICTURE BY PICTURE screen will be displayed, depending on which was selected in the [MODE] setting screen.

3. PressthePIPbuttonagaintoreturntothenormalscreen(singlepicture).

TIP:• Selectinganothersourcewillreturntothenormalscreen.• Selectingasourcenotsupportedforthemainpictureorthesubpicturewillreturntothenormalscreen.

[POSITION]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthepositionofasubpictureinthemainpicture.

NOTE: • Thedefaultsettingis[BOTTOM-RIGHT].

Usethe or buttontoselectthesubpicture’spositionandpresstheENTERbutton.Theoptionsare:TOP-LEFT,TOP-RIGHT,BOTTOM-LEFT,andBOTTOM-RIGHT.

Thefollowingadjustmentsandsettingsareavailableforthemainpictureonly.-Adjustingpictureandsound

-Magnifyingapicture

Thefollowingoperationsareavailableforboththemainandsubpictures.-Pictureandaudiomute

-Freezingamovingpicture

37


Preventing the Unauthorized Use of the Projector [SECURITY]AkeywordcanbesetforyourprojectorusingtheMenutoavoidoperationbyanunauthorizeduser.Whenakeywordisset,turningontheprojectorwilldisplaytheKeywordinputscreen.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,thepro-jectorcannotprojectanimage.•The[SECURITY]settingcannotbecancelledbyusingthe[RESET]ofthemenu.

ToenabletheSecurityfunction:



2. Press the buttontwicetoselect[SETUP]andpressthebuttonortheENTERbuttontoselect[BA-SIC].

3. Press the buttontoselect[INSTALLATION(2)].

4. Press the buttonthreetimestoselect[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.

5. Press the buttontoselect[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The [SECURITY KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.

6. TypeinacombinationofthefourbuttonsandpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE:Akeywordmustbe4to10digitsinlength.

The [CONFIRM KEYWORD] screen will be displayed.

NOTE:Makeanoteofyourpasswordandstoreitinasafeplace.

38


7. TypeinthesamecombinationofbuttonsandpresstheENTERbutton.

The confirmation screen will be displayed.

8. Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The SECURITY function has been enabled.

Toturnontheprojectorwhen[SECURITY]isenabled:

1. PressthePOWERbutton.

The projector will be turned on and display a message to the effect that the projector is locked.


3. TypeinthecorrectkeywordandpresstheENTERbutton.Theprojectorwilldisplayanimage.

NOTE:Thesecuritydisablemodeismaintaineduntilthemainpoweristurnedofforunpluggingthepowercord.

39


TodisabletheSECURITYfunction:



2.Select[SETUP]→[INSTALLATION(2)]→[SECURITY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The OFF/ON menu will be displayed.

3. Select[OFF]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The SECURITY KEYWORD screen will be displayed.

4. TypeinyourkeywordandpresstheENTERbutton.

When the correct keyword is entered, the SECURITY function will be disabled.

NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourkeyword,contactyourdealer.Yourdealerwillprovideyouwithyourkeywordinexchangeforyourrequestcode.YourrequestcodeisdisplayedintheKeywordConfirmationscreen.Inthisexample[NB52-YGK8-2VD6-K585-JNE6-EYA8]isarequestcode.

40


Controlling the Projector by Using an HTTP BrowserOverviewTheHTTPServerfunctionprovidessettingsandoperationsfor:1. Settingforwired/wirelessnetwork(NETWORKSETTINGS)

To use wireless LAN connection, the optional USB Wireless LAN Unit is required. (→ page 151)

To use wired/wireless LAN connection, connect the projector to the computer with a commercially available LAN cable. (→ page 150)

2. SettingAlertMail(ALERTMAIL)

When the projector is connected to a wired/wireless network, lamp replace time or error messages will be sent via e-mail.

3. Operatingtheprojector

Power on/off, selecting input, volume control and picture adjustments are possible.

4. SettingPJLinkPASSWORDandAMXBEACON

TwowaysofaccesstotheHTTPserverfunctionareavailable:• StarttheWebbrowseronthecomputerviathenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorandenterthefollowing

URL:

http://<theprojector’sIPaddress>/index.html

• UseImageExpressUtilityLiteorImageExpressUtility2.0containedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.

TIP:ThefactorysettingIPaddressis[DHCPON].

NOTE: • Tousetheprojectorinanetwork,consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutnetworksettings.• Thedisplay’sorbutton’sresponsecanbesloweddownoroperationmaynotbeaccepteddependingthesettingsofyournet-

work. Shouldthishappen,consultyournetworkadministrator.Theprojectormaynotrespondifitsbuttonsarerepeatedlypressedinrapidintervals.Shouldthishappen,waitamomentandrepeat.Ifyoustillcan’tgetanyresponse,turnoffandbackontheprojec-tor.

• IfthePROJECTORNETWORKSETTINGSscreendoesnotappearinthewebbrowser,presstheCtrl+F5keystorefreshyourwebbrowser(orclearthecache).

• Thisdeviceuses“JavaScript”and“Cookies”andthebrowsershouldbesettoacceptthesefunctions.Thesettingmethodwillvarydependingontheversionofbrowser.Pleaserefertothehelpfilesandtheotherinformationprovidedinyoursoftware.

Preparation before UseConnecttheprojectortoacommerciallyavailableLANcablebeforeengaginginbrowseroperations.(→page150)Operationwithabrowserthatusesaproxyservermaynotbepossibledependingonthetypeofproxyserverandthesettingmethod.Althoughthetypeofproxyserverwillbeafactor,itispossiblethatitemsthathaveactuallybeensetwillnotbedisplayeddependingontheeffectivenessofthecache,andthecontentssetfromthebrowsermaynotbereflectedinoperation.Itisrecommendedthataproxyservernotbeusedunlessitisunavoidable.

41


Handling of the Address for Operation via a BrowserRegardingtheactualaddressthatisenteredfortheaddressorenteredtotheURLcolumnwhenoperationofthepro-jectorisviaabrowser,thehostnamecanbeusedasitiswhenthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeenregisteredtothedomainnameserverbyanetworkadministrator,orthehostnamecorrespondingtotheIPaddressoftheprojectorhasbeensetinthe“HOSTS”fileofthecomputerbeingused.

Example1:Whenthehostnameoftheprojectorhasbeensetto“pj.nec.co.jp”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingbyspecifying http://pj.nec.co.jp/index.html fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.

Example2:WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectoris“192.168.73.1”,accessisgainedtothenetworksettingbyspecifying http://192.168.73.1/index.html fortheaddressortheentrycolumnoftheURL.

PROJECTOR ADJUSTMENT

POWER:Thiscontrolsthepoweroftheprojector.ON �� Power is switched on�OFF �� Power is switched off�

VOLUME:Thiscontrolsthevolumeoftheprojector. �� Increases the volume adjustment value� �� Decreases the volume adjustment value�

AV-MUTE:Thiscontrolsthemutefunctionoftheprojector.PICTURE ON �� Mutes the video�PICTURE OFF �� Cancels the video muting�SOUND ON �� Mutes the audio�SOUND OFF �� Cancels the audio muting�ALL ON �� Mutes each of the video, and audio functions�ALL OFF �� Cancels the muting of each of the video, and audio functions�

42


PICTURE:Controlsthevideoadjustmentoftheprojector.BRIGHTNESS �� Increases the brightness adjustment value�BRIGHTNESS �� Decreases the brightness adjustment value�CONTRAST �� Increases the contrast adjustment value�CONTRAST �� Decreases the contrast adjustment value�COLOR �� Increases the color adjustment value�COLOR �� Decreases the color adjustment value�HUE �� Increases the hue adjustment value�HUE �� Decreases the hue adjustment value�SHARPNESS �� Increases the sharpness adjustment value�SHARPNESS �� Decreases the sharpness adjustment value�

• Thefunctionsthatcanbecontrolledwillvarydependingonthesignalbeinginputtotheprojector.(→page93)

SOURCESELECT:Thisswitchestheinputconnectoroftheprojector.COMPUTER 1 �� Switches to the COMPUTER 1 IN connector�COMPUTER 2 �� Switches to the COMPUTER 2 IN connector�COMPUTER 3 �� Switches to the COMPUTER 3 IN connector�HDMI �� Switches to the HDMI IN connector�DisplayPort �� Switches to the DisplayPort�VIDEO �� Switches to the VIDEO IN connector�S-VIDEO �� Switches to the S-VIDEO IN connector�VIEWER �� Switches to the data on the USB memory device�NETWORK �� Switches to a LAN signal�

PROJECTORSTATUS:Thisdisplaystheconditionoftheprojector.LAMP LIFE REMAINING ��Displays the remaining life of the lamp as a percentage�LAMP HOURS USED ��Displays how many hours the lamp has been used�FILTER HOURS USED ��Displays how many hours the filter has been used�ERROR STATUS ��Displays the status of errors occurring within the projector�

LOGOFF:Loggingoffyourprojectorandreturningtotheauthenticationscreen(LOGONscreen).

43


NETWORK SETTINGS

•SETTINGS

WIRED or WIRELESS

SETTING SetforwiredLANorforwirelessLAN.

APPLY ApplyyoursettingstowiredLANorwirelessLAN.

DHCPON AutomaticallyassignIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.

DHCPOFF SetIPaddress,subnetmask,andgatewaytotheprojectorassignedbyyournetworkadministrator.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.

WINS SettheIPaddressofyourWINSserverofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedon,thisoptionisnotavailable.

AUTODNSON DHCPserverwillautomaticallyassign IPaddressofDNSserverconnected to theprojector.

AUTODNSOFF SetyourIPaddressofDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.

SettingforWIREDLAN

PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwiredLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE2.

DISABLE TurnoffwiredLANconnection

SettingforWIRELESSLAN(theoptionalWirelessLANUnitrequiredforEurope,Australia,andAsiancoun-tries)

EASYCONNECTION ExecuteawirelessLANusingEASYCONNECTION.

SIMPLEACCESPOINT Settheprojectorforsimpleaccesspoint.

WPS UseWPS(Wi-FiProtectedSetup™)tosetupthewirelessLANfortheprojector.NOTE:Usetheprojector’smenustomakeWPSconnectionsandchangetheWPSprofilesettings.

CHANNEL Selectachannel.Availablechannelsvarydependingonthecountryandregion.Whenyouselect[INFRASTRUCTURE],makesurethattheprojectorandyouraccesspointareonthesamechannel;whenyouselect[ADHOC],makesurethattheprojectorandyourcomputerareonthesamechannel.

PROFILE1/PROFILE2 TwosettingscanbesetforwirelessLANconnection.SelectPROFILE1orPROFILE2.

44


SSID Enteran identifier (SSID) forwirelessLAN.CommunicationcanbedoneonlywithequipmentwhoseSSIDmatchesSSIDforyourwirelessLAN.

SITESURVEY DisplaysalistofavailableSSIDsforwirelessLANonsite.SelectanSSIDwhichyoucanaccess.

NETWORKTYPE SelectcommunicationmethodwhenusingwirelessLAN.INFRASTRUCTURE:Selectthisoptionwhencommunicatingwithoneormoreequip-mentconnectedtothewirelessLANnetworkviaawirelessaccesspoint.ADHOC:SelectthisoptionwhenusingthewirelessLANtodirectlycommunicatewithacomputerinpeer-to-peermode.

SECURITYTYPE Turnonorofftheencryptionmodeforsecuretransmission.Whenturnontheencryp-tionmode,setWEPkeyorencryptedkey.

DISABLE Willnotturnontheencryptionfeature.Yourcommunicationsmaybemonitoredbysomeone.

WEP64bit Uses64-bitdatalengthforsecuretransmission.

WEP128bit Uses128-bitdatalengthforsecuretransmission.Thisoptionwillincrease privacy and security when compared to use of 64-bitdatalengthencryption.

WPA-PSKTKIP/WPA-PSKAES/WPA2-PSKTKIP/WPA2-PSKAES/WPA-EAPTKIPEAP-TLS/WPA-EAPAESEAP-TLS/WPA-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPTKIPEAP-TLS/WPA2-EAPAESEAP-TLS/WPA2-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2

TheseoptionsparovidestrongersecuritythanWEP.

NOTE:• TheWEPsettingsmustbethesameascommunicationdevicessuchasPCoraccesspointinyourwirelessnetwork.

• WhenyouuseWEP,yourimagetransmissionspeedwillslowdown.• OtherencryptionkeysthanWEP64bitandWEP128bitarenotavailablewhen[ADHOC]isselectedfrom[NETWORKTYPE].

• Toinstalladigitalcertificate,usetheprojector’smenu.(→page125)

INDEX Selectencryptionkeywhenselecting[WEP64bit]or[WEP128bit] in[SECURITYTYPE].

KEY Whenselecting[WEP64bit]or[WEP128bit]in[SECURITYTYPE]:EnterWEPkey.

Select Characters(ASCII) Hexadecimaldigit(HEX)

WEP64bit Upto5characters Upto10characters

WEP128bit Upto13characters Upto26characters

When selecting [WPA PSK-TKIP], [WPA PSK-AES], [WPA2 PSK-TKIP] or [WPA2PSK-AES]:Enterencryptionkey.Keylengthmustbe8orgreaterand63orless.

USERNAME SetausernameforWPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP.

PASSWORD SetapasswordforWPA-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2.

45


USEDIGITALCERTIFI-CATE

SelectthisifyouuseadigitalcertificateforWPA-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPTKIPPEAP-MSCHAPv2/WPA2-EAPAESPEAP-MSCHAPv2.

•NAME

PROJECTORNAME Enteranameforyourprojectorso thatyourcomputercan identify theprojector.Aprojectornamemustbe16charactersorless.TIP:Projectornamewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

HOSTNAME Enterthehostnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Ahostnamemustbe15 or less.

DOMAINNAME Enter thedomainnameof thenetworkconnectedtotheprojector.Adomainnamemustbe60charactersorless.

•ALERTMAIL

ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroflampreplacetimeorerrormessagesviae-mailwhenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.PlacingacheckmarkwillturnontheAlertMailfeature.ClearingacheckmarkwillturnofftheAlertMailfeature.Sampleofamessagetobesentfromtheprojector:

Thelampandfiltersareattheendofitsusablelife.Pleasereplacethelampandfilters.ProjectorName:NECProjectorLampHoursUsed:100[H]

SENDER’SADDRESS Entersender’saddress.

SMTPSERVERNAME EntertheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojector.

RECIPIENT’SADDRESS1,2,3

Enteryourrecipient’saddress.Uptothreeaddressescanbeentered.

TESTMAIL SendatestmailtocheckwhetheryoursettingsarecorrectornotNOTE:• Ifyouexecuteatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkifnetworksettingsarecorrect.

• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail.Shouldthishappen,checkiftheRecipient’sAddressiscorrect.

SAVE Clickthisbuttontosaveyoursettingstotheprojector’smemory.

46


•NETWORKSERVICE

PJLinkPASSWORD SetapasswordforPJLink*.Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,consultwithyourdealer.

HTTPPASSWORD SetapasswordforHTTPserver.Apasswordmustbe10charactersorless.

AMXBEACON TurnonorofffordetectionfromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.TIP:WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwillrec-ognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.PlacingacheckmarkwillenabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.ClearingacheckmarkwilldisabledetectingtheprojectorfromAMXDeviceDiscovery.

NOTE:Ifyouforgetyourpassword,contactyourdealer.

*WhatisPJLink?PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectorsofdifferentmanufacturers.Thisstandardproto-colisestablishedbyJapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssociation(JBMIA)in2005.TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

•CRESTRON

DISABLE DisablesCrestronControl™.

ENABLE EnablesCrestronControl.

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofCrestronserver.

IPID SetyourIPIDofCrestronserver.

•INFORMATION

WIREDLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwiredLANconnection.

WIRELESSLAN DisplayalistofsettingsofwirelessLANconnection.

UPDATE Reflectsettingswhentheyarechanged.

47


Projecting Your Computer’s Screen Image from the Projector via a Network [NETWORK PROJECTOR]ByselectingtheprojectorconnectedtothesamenetworkasthatofyourPC,thePCscreenimagecanbeprojectedtothescreenvianetwork.Thereisnoneedofconnectionusingthecomputercable(VGA).

Operation Environment

ApplicableOS Windows7ProfessionalWindows7UltimateWindows7EnterpriseWindowsVistaHomePremiumWindowsVistaBusinessWindowsVistaUltimateWindowsVistaEnterprise

Hardwarespecifications ThespecificationsrecommendedbyMicrosoftastheoperationenvironmentforWindows7/WindowsVistashouldbesatisfied.

NetworkEnvironment WiredLANorwirelessLANenvironmentthatsupportsTCP/IPisrequired.

Screencolor HighColor(16bits)TrueColor(24bitsand32bits)*Settingwith256colorsorlessisnotavailable.

SettingtheProjectortoNetworkProjectorInputMode1. Withtheprojectorturnedon,presstheSOURCEbutton.

The input selection window appears.

Another way to display the input selection window is to press the NETWORK button on the remote control. The APPLICATION MENU screen will be displayed. Go to step 3.

48


2. Press the or buttontoselect[NETWORK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

In the screen, the [APPLICATION MENU] menu is displayed.

3. Fromthe[APPLICATIONMENU]menu,select[NETWORKPROJECTOR].

The [PROJECTOR NAME/DISPLAY RESOLUTION/PASSWORD/URL] will be displayed.

49


ProjectingtheImagewithNetworkProjector1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.

2. Click[AllPrograms].

3. Click[Accessories].

4. Click[ConnecttoaNetworkProjector].

When the [Permission Connect to a Network Projector] window appears, click [Yes.].

The “Connect to a Network Projector” window appears.

5. Click[→Searchforaprojector(recommended)].

In the “Available projectors” box, “PA600 Series” is displayed.

6. Click[PA600Series].

The message “Enter the password for the projector that you selected.” is displayed at the bottom of the window.

50


7. Inputthepasswordtothepasswordinputboxdisplayedbytheoperationatstep3onpage44.

8. Click[Connect].

The network projector function works and the screen of Windows 7 is projected from the projector.

• Iftheresolutionofyourcomputer’sscreenisdifferentfromtheprojector’sscreenresolution,theNETWORKPROJECTOR function may not work. If this happens, change the resolution of the computer’s screen to lower resolution than the one displayed at Step 3 on page 48.

NOTE:Whenthenetworkprojectorfunctionworks,thebackgroundcolorofthedesktopchangestoblack.Whenthenetworkprojectorfunctionisstopped,theoriginalbackgroundcolorisrestored.

Reference:IftheprojectorcannotbefoundatStep5,click[→Entertheprojectoraddress].Then,inputthe“Networkaddress”(Inputexample:http://10.32.97.61/lan)and“Projectorpassword”(Inputexample:82291627)displayedinthescreenprojectedfromtheprojector.

ExitingtheNetworkProjectorOperation

1. Click[Projecting:PA600Series]intheWindowsVistataskbar.

2. Click[Disconnect].

The Network Projector function is stopped.

3. PresstheSOURCEbuttonoftheprojectortoselectaninputterminalotherthan[NETWORK].

When using the remote control, press a button other than the NETWORK button.

51


Using the Projector to Operate Your Computer via a Network [REMOTE DESKTOP]• ByselectingthePCconnectedtothesamenetworkasthatoftheprojector,thePCscreenimagecanbeprojected

tothescreenvianetwork.

Then,byoperatingthekeyboard,youcanoperateWindows7,WindowsVistaorWindowsXPonthePCconnectedwiththenetwork.

• WiththeRemoteDesktopfunction,youcanremotelyoperatethePCplacedatadistancefromtheprojector.

Meetingroom

Office

NOTE:• The[REMOTEDESKTOP]functionwillworkonthefollowingWindowseditions. Windows7Professional Windows7Ultimate Windows 7 Enterprise WindowsVistaBusiness WindowsVistaUltimate WindowsVistaEnterprise WindowsXPProfessionalwithServicePack3 (Note)• Inthisuser’smanualthisfeatureisdescribedusingWindows7asanexample,butWindowsVistaandWindowsXPProfessionalServicePack2orlaterwillalsoworkwiththisfeature.

• AkeyboardisrequiredtousetheRemoteDesktopfunction.• TheRemoteDesktopfunctioncanbeoperatedwithakeyboard.Usingawirelessmousewithawirelesskeyboardismoreusefulforoperating.Useacommerciallyavailablewirelesskeyboard,awirelessmouse,andaUSBwirelessreceiver.UseacommerciallyavailableUSBkeyboardandUSBmouse.

• AUSBkeyboardwithabuilt-inUSBhubcannotbeusedwiththeprojector.• AwirelesskeyboardormousethatsupportsBluetoothcannotbeusedwiththeprojector.• WedonotwarrantthattheUSBportoftheprojectorwillsupportallUSBdevicesinthemarket.

Prepareacommerciallyavailablewirelesskeyboard(USlayoutversion).

ConnecttheUSBwirelessreceivertotheUSBport(TypeA)oftheprojector.Makeallnecessarysettingsforyourwirelesskeyboardandmouse.

52


SettingthepasswordtotheuseraccountofWindows7TIP:Ifapasswordhasbeensetforanaccount,thesteps1to9canbeskipped.1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.

2. Click[ControlPanel].

3. Click[Addorremoveuseraccounts]displayedunder[UserAccounts].

4. Whenthe[UserAccountControl]confirmationwindowappears,click[Continue].

5. Click[Administrator].

6. Click[Createapassword].

7. Inputthepasswordtothe[Newpassword]box.

8. InputthesamepasswordasthatatStep7tothe[Confirmnewpassword]box.

9. Click[Createapassword].

The Administrator is changed to [Password Protection].

SettingtheRemoteAccess1. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.


3. Click[SystemandSecurity].

4. Click[Allowremoteaccess]displayedunder[System].

5. Whenthe[UserAccountControl]confirmationwindowappears,click[Continue].

The [System Properties] window appears.

6. Click[AllowconnectionsfromcomputersrunninganyversionofRemoteDesktop(lesssecure)]intheRemoteDesktopboxandclick[OK].

CheckingtheIPaddressonWindows71. Click[Start]fromthedesktopofWindows7.


3. Click[Viewnetworkstatusandtasks]displayedunder[NetworkandInternet].

53


4. Click[Viewstatus]displayedinblueontherightof[LocalAreaConnection]inthewindow.

The [Local Area Connection Status] window appears.

5. Click[Details...].

Write down the value for “IPv4 IP Address” (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) displayed.

6. Click[Close].

7. Click[X]attheupperrightofthewindow.

The system goes back to the desktop.

StartingtheRemoteDesktop1. Withtheprojectorturnedon,presstheSOURCEbutton.

The input selection window appears.

Another way to display the input selection window is to press the NETWORK button on the remote control. The NETWORK screen will be displayed. Go to step 3.

54


2. Press the or buttontoselect[NETWORK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The [NETWORK] menu will be displayed.

3. Fromthe[NETWORK]menu,usethewirelesskeyboardtoselect[REMOTEDESKTOPCONNECTION].

The [REMOTE DESKTOP CONNECTION] window appears.

4. OperatethewirelesskeyboardtoinputtheIPaddressofWindows7andclick“Connect”.

The log-on screen of Windows 7 is displayed in the screen projected by the projector.

5. Operatethewirelesskeyboardtoinputtheuser’spasswordandpress“Enter”.

The remote desktop function is started.

Windows 7 desktop is displayed in the screen projected by the projector.

Log out the computer.

Use the wireless keyboard connected to the projector to operate Windows 7.

NOTE:When theprojection ismadewith the remotedesktop function, thebackgroundcolorof thedesktop ischanged toblack.

55


ExitingtheRemoteDesktop1. Operatethewirelesskeyboardtoclick[Start]fromthedesktopscreenprojectedbytheprojector.

2. Click[X]ontherightofthestartmenu.

The remote desktop function is stopped.

3. PresstheSOURCEbuttonoftheprojectortoselectaninputterminalotherthan[NETWORK].

When using the remote control, press a button other than the NETWORK button.

TIP:Setting[OPTIONS]inREMOTEDESKTOPClicking[OPTIONS]displaysthe[PERFORMANCE]screen.Makingsettingsto[OPTIONS]willallowyoutodisplaythedesktopbackground,ortoenablethewindowanimationfunctionduringtheRemoteDesktopoperation.However,doingthiswillcausethedisplay’sormouse’sresponsetoslowdown.Ifthedisplay’sormouse’sresponseissloweddown,tryoneormoreofthefollowing:

DESKTOPBACKGROUND:Clearthecheckmarktodisplaythedesktopbackgroundinmonochrome.MENUANDWINDOWANIMATION:Clearthecheckmarktodisablemenuandwindowanimation.THEMES:ClearthecheckmarknottouseThemes.SHOWCONTENTSOFWINDOWWHILEDRAGGING:Clearthecheckmarktoshowonlythewindowpanewhiledragging.

56

4. Using the Viewer❶ What you can do with the ViewerTheViewerfeatureallowsyoutoviewslidesormoviefilesstoredonaUSBmemoryontheprojector,orasharedfolderinacomputerconnectedtothenetwork.TheViewerhasthefollowingfeatures.

• WhenacommerciallyavailableUSBmemorythatstoresimagefilesisinsertedintotheUSBport(TypeA)oftheprojector,theViewerallowsyoutoviewtheimagefilesontheUSBmemory.

Evenifnocomputerisavailable,presentationscanbeconductedsimplywiththeprojector.

• Moviefilewithaudiocanbeplayedback.

• AMicrosoftPowerPointfileorAdobePDFfilecanbesimplyprojectedonthescreenwithoutconnectingacom-puter.

• Imageandmoviefilesstoredinasharedfolderinacomputerconnectedtoanetworkcanbeprojected.

Thecomputerwith“MediaSharing”ofWindowsMediaPlayer11turnedoncanbeusedasamediaserver.

Supportedgraphicformats

Format Filenameextension

JPEG .jpg,.jpe,.jpeg(CMYKisnotsupported.)

BMP .bmp(bitfieldnotsupported)

PNG .png(InterlacedPNGandαchannelPNGarenotsupported.)

GIF .gif(InterlacedGIF,transparationGIF,andanimationGIFarenotsupported.)

*ByusingPPTConverter3.0,PowerPointfileisconvertedintoindexfile(withextension“.idx”)*Ifanunsupportedimageisselected,theicon willbedisplayed.

NOTE: Maximumnumberofpixelsofimagewhichcanbedisplayedare:• ProgressiveJPEG:1280×1280• GIF:1280×1280• Others:4000×4000

Supported movie files

Filenameextension Videocompression/expansionmethod Audiocompression/expansionmethod

.mpg,.mpeg. MPEG2 MPEGAudioLayer2

MPEGAudioLayer3

.wmv VC-1/WMV9 WMA9Standard

.mp4 H.264/AVC AAC-LC

Playbackrequirements:Resolution:320×240to1280×720Videoframerate:upto30fpsBitrate:upto15MbpsAudiosamplingrate:upto48kHzChannel:upto2chstereoAudiobitrate:upto256KbpsMax.filesize:upto2GB

57

4. Using the Viewer

NOTE:• Moviefilesconvertedbyusingthevideo/audioformatwhichisnotsupportedbythisprojectorcannotbeplayedback. Inthiscase,therewillbenoicontoshowthatplaybackisnotpossible.• FileswithDigitalRightsManagement(DRM)protectioncannotbeplayedback.• Someofthemoviefilesthatmeettheaboverequirementsmaynotbeplayedback.• WMVformatvideofilewillbedisplayedinanaspectratioof1to1independentlyofitsoriginalaspectratio.• Filesthatcanbeplayedbackonthemediaserveraregraphicsandmoviefiles. InWindowsMediaPlayer11(WindowsXP/WindowsVista)mp4filescannotbeplayedback.

Supported PDF files

Filenameextension Supportedfileformat

.pdf AdobeAcrobatPDF

NOTE:• FontsnotembeddedinPDFmaynotbedisplayed• FunctionsaddedtoPDFfileaftercreatedwillnotworkordisplay.Functionsaddedarebookmarks,boxesinformtool,andnotes

will not be displayed. AutofliporAutotransitionwillnotwork.• SomePDFfilesmaynotbedisplayed.

SupportedPowerPointfiles

Filenameextension Supportedfileformat

.ppt MicrosoftPowerPoint97–2003

NOTE:• Playablefonts,colors,fontornament,placement,objectinsertionoranimationarerestricted.• SomeMicrosoftPowerPoint97–2003filesmaynotbedisplayed.

Supported USB memory devices- BesuretouseaUSBmemorydeviceformattedwiththeFAT,exFAT,FAT32orFAT16filesystem.

TheprojectordoesnotsupportNTFSformattedUSBmemory.

IftheprojectordoesnotrecognizeyourUSBmemory,checkiftheformatissupported.

ToformatyourUSBmemoryinyourcomputer,refertothedocumentorhelpfilethatcomeswithyourWin-dows.

- WedonotwarrantthattheUSBportoftheprojectorwillsupportallUSBmemoriesinthemarket.

- Waitatleast5secondsafterdisconnectingaUSBmemorydevicebeforereconnectingitandviceversa.

TheprojectormaynotidentifytheUSBmemorydeviceifitisrepeatedlyconnectedanddisconnectedinrapidintervals.

58

4. Using the Viewer

Notices on shared folder and media server• Filesfromasharedfolderormediaservermaynotbeprojectedifsecurityorantivirussoftwareisinstalledonyour

computer.

• Openthefollowingfirewallports:

- Mediaserver

Portnumber Protocol1900 UDP2869 TCP10243 TCP10280-10284 UDP

- Sharedfolder

Portnumber Protocol137 UDP/TCP138 UDP/TCP139 UDP/TCP445 UDP/TCP

• Setyourcomputerforsharingandsecuritytograntaccesstofilesinthesharedfolderandsetyoursecurityorantivirussoftwaretograntaccesstofilesinthesharedfolder.Consultyournetworkadministratorformoreinforma-tion.

• Moviefilesinthesharedfolderorthemediaservermaynotbeplayedbackcorrectlydependingonyournetworkenvironmentorthebitrateofyourfile.

NOTE:DonotdisconnectbetweentheprojectorandyourcomputerbyremovingtheLANcableorturningofftheprojectorwhenaPow-erPointfileorPDFfileisdisplayedfromasharedfolder.DoingsowillmakeViewerinoperable.

NOTE• ThefollowingoperationsbyusingthebuttonsontheprojectorarenotpossiblewhentheVIEWERscreensuchastheslidescreenandthethumbnailscreenisdisplayed.- AutoAdjustmentbyusingtheAUTOADJ.button- Volumecontrolwiththe◀ or ▶button

• FreezingpicturebyusingtheFREEZE,ASPECT,orAUTOADJ.buttonontheremotecontrolisnotpossiblewhentheVIEWERscreensuchastheslidescreenandthethumbnailscreenisdisplayed.

• Executing[RESET]→[ALLDATA]fromthemenuwillreturnthesettingsfortheViewertoolbartothefactorydefault.

59

4. Using the Viewer

❷ Preparing presentation materials

1. Createyourpresentationmaterialsandsavetheminasupportedfileformattoyourcomputer.

• Seepage81 for supported file formats.

• MakesurethatPowerPointfileisdisplayedontheViewerbeforegivingyourrealpresentation.

With Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 contained the supplied CD-ROM, you can convert your PowerPoint files to index files that can be displayed on the Viewer.

• WhencreatingaPDFfile,embedyourfontsinyourPDFfile.EmbeddingfontsrequiresAdobeAcrobat.Thiscannot be done in Adobe Reader.

TIP:•UsingPrintCommandExampleforfontembeddingusingPrintCommand.SeethehelpofAdobeAcrobatformoreinformation.1. Select“Print”fromthe“File”menu.

2. Select“AdobePDF”from“Printername”andclickthe“Properties”but-ton.

3. Clickthe“Edit”buttoninthe“AdobePDFSettings”tab.

4. ClickthefonttabintheEditwindowtoselectthefontembedwindow.

5. Placeacheckmarkfor“Embedallfonts”.

Click “OK” to return to the Print window, and click “OK” to start creating a PDF file.

2. Saveafiletoyourdrive.

To save a file to your USB memory:

Use the Windows Explore to copy the file to your USB memory.

To place a file in a shared folder you create in your computer, see page 72.

To use “Media Sharing” in Windows Media Player 11, see page 76.

60

4. Using the Viewer

❸ Projecting images stored in a USB memory device

ThissectionexplainsthebasicoperationoftheViewer.TheexplanationprovidestheoperationalprocedurewhentheViewertoolbarissettothefactorydefault.

Preparation:BeforestartingtheViewer,storeimagestotheUSBmemoryusingyourcomputer.

Starting the Viewer

1. Turnontheprojector.(→ page 14)

2. InserttheUSBmemoryintotheUSBportoftheprojec-tor.

NOTE:• DonotremovetheUSBmemoryfromtheprojectorwhileit’sLEDflashes.Doingsomaycorruptthedata.

TIP:YoucanaUSBmemoryinserttheprojectorwhenthedrivelistscreenis displayed.

3. PresstheSOURCEbuttontoselect[VIEWER].

A press of the SOURCE button will display the source select screen.

A few more presses of the SOURCE button will display the drive list screen.

Another way to select [VIEWER] is to press the VIEWER button on the remote control.

TIP:• Formoreinformationaboutthedrivelistscreen,seepage64.• Todisplaygraphicsinasharedfolder,seepage72; to display still imagesormoviefilesinamediaserver,seepage76.

61

4. Using the Viewer

4. Press the ▶ button to select“USB1” and press theENTERbutton.

The “USB1” thumbnail screen will be displayed.

TIP:• Formoreinformationaboutthumbnailscreen,seepage66.

5. Use the ▲▼◀ or ▶ button to select an icon.

• The→ (arrow) symbol on the right indicates there are more pages. pressing the PAGE ▽ (page down) button will show the next page: pressing the PAGE △ (page up) will show the previous page.


Operation varies depending on the selected file.

•Stillimage

The selected slide will be displayed.

The ◀ or ▶ button can be used to select the next (right) slide or the previous (left) slide in the thumbnail screen.

• PressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplaythecontrolbarwith which is used to select or rotate an slide.(→ page 67)

62

4. Using the Viewer

•Moviefile

The movie file will start playing.

After finishing the playback, the screen will turn to black. Press the EXIT button to return to the thumbnail screen.

• Pressing the ENTER button will display the movie’scontrol bar with which you can pause or fastforward and some other operations.

•MicrosoftPowerPointfile

The slide on the first page will be displayed.

Press ▶ to select the next slide; press ◀ to select the previ-ous slide.

• Youcanalsousethe▼ or ▲ button to select a page. To return to the thumbnail screen, press the EXIT button.

NOTE:• Fileswith slideshowor animation effectsmay not be correctlydisplayedontheViewer.

See“SupportedPowerPointfiles”onpage57, 81.

•AdobePDFfile

The first page will be displayed.

• ThePDFfilewillfillthewidthofthescreen.

Pressing the ▼ or ▲ button will scroll the screen down or up.

The PAGE ▽ or PAGE △ button will move the screen one page down or up.

To return to the thumbnail screen, press the EXIT button.

• Whenapassowordinputwindowisdisplayed,itmeansthat the PDF file is password-protected.

Pressing the ENTER button will show the software keyboard. Use the software keyboard to enter your password.

Select [OK] and press the ENTER button. The PDF file will be displayed.

• Formoreinformationonthesoftwarekeyboard,seepage131.

NOTE:BookmarksandnotesthatwereaddedafterPDFconversionwillnotbe displayed.IffontswerenotembeddedatthetimeofPDFconversion,thosefontswill not be displayed.

TIP:Ittakessometime(about30secondstotwominutes)todisplayalargesizefileortoturnpagesofaPDFfilethathasmanypages.

63

4. Using the Viewer

•Indexfile(extension:.idx)

• Index files, which is converted by usingViewer PPTConverter 3.0, will appear in the Thumbnail screen.

Only folders and JPEG files converted by using Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 will appear in the Thumbnail screen.

• Toselectslideshowofindexfiles,openthe[PRESENTA-TION] folder in the DRIVE LIST screen.

However, index files will not appear. Only folders and JPEG files will appear.

• UptofourindexfoldersinyourUSBandsharedfolderare displayed. The four folders will be displayed in reverse chronological order

• WhenyouinserttheUSBmemorydevicestoringindexwith the Viewer in operation, the content of the index files will be displayed.

NOTE:• Theplaymode(MANUAL/AUTO)forslidesofindexfileworksinthefollowingway:

Incaseof[MANUAL]for[PLAYMODE] Whenyouselect[OPTIONS]→[SLIDESETTING]→[PLAYMODE]

→[MANUAL],indexfileswillbesetformanualplaybackinregard-lessofwhether[INTERVAL]isset.

Incaseof[AUTO]selectedfor[PLAYMODE] Whenyouselect[OPTIONS]→[SLIDESETTING]→[PLAYMODE]

→ [AUTO], indexfileswill be set for auto playback at intervalsspecifiedbyusing[INTERVAL].

When,however,[-1]isselectedfor[INTERVAL],theplaymodewillbesetforautoplaybackaccordingtothesettingfor[OPTIONS]→ [SLIDESETTING]→[INTERVAL].

7. RemovetheUSBmemoryfromtheprojector.

Return to the drive list screen. Make sure that the LED on the USB memory is not flashing before removing the USB memory.

NOTE:IfyouremovetheUSBmemoryfromtheprojectorwithaslidedisplayed,theprojectormaynotoperatecorrectly.Ifthishappens,turnofftheprojectorandunplugthepowercord.Wait3minutes,thenconnectthepowercord,andturnontheprojector.

Exiting the Viewer1. PresstheSOURCEbuttontoselectasourceotherthan

[VIEWER].

A press of the SOURCE button will display the source select screen.

A few more presses of the SOURCE button will display another source.

• To exit theViewer using the remote control, select asource other than [VIEWER].

XXXX Motors

64

4. Using the Viewer

Names and functions of Viewer screen

TheViewerhasthreescreens:Drivelistscreen,Thumbnailscreen,andSlidescreen.

•DrivelistscreenDisplaysalistofdrivesconnectedtotheprojector.

Menu operation• Usethe▼ or ▲buttontomovethecursorupordown.SelectthemenuitemandpresstheENTERbutton

todisplaythesubmenu.

Operation for Drive list screen1. Press the ▶ button to move the cursor to the drive list.

(Use the ◀ or ▶ button to switch between the menu and the drive list.)

Press the ▼ or ▲ button to select a type of drive; press the ◀ or ▶ button to select the drive connected to the projector.

2. SelectthedriveandpresstheENTERbuttontoswitchtothethumbnailscreenoftheselecteddrive.

Cursor (yellow)

Cursor (yellow)

Menu Menu Scroll bar

[Drive list screen] [Thumbnail screen]

Folder icon

Path information

Drive information/File information

Menu guide Operation button guide

Control bar* The operation for still image differs from that for movie.

[Slide screen]

65

4. Using the Viewer

Functions

Name Description

REFRESH Displaysadditionalmediaserversinthedrivelistscreen.

OPTIONS OpenstheOPTIONSmenu.

SLIDESETTING Setsupslides.(→page69)

MOVIESETTING Setsupmoviefiles.(→page70)

AUTOPLAYSETTING Setsupautoplay.(→page70)

SHAREEDFOLDER Setsupasharedfolder.(→page72)

MEDIASERVER Setsupamediaserver.(→page76)

RETURN ClosestheOPTIONSmenu.

SYSTEMSETTING Switchestothesystemsettingmenu.SeewiredLAN,wirelessLAN,WPS,network information, mouse, and keyboard in “9. Application Menu”. (→ page118)

USB Displays the icon for a USB memory inserted into the USB port of theprojector.

SHAREDFOLDER DisplaysuptofourdrivesofacomputerconnectedtoaLAN(setforcon-nectingasharedfolder).*Seepage72forsettingupforconnectingasharedfoleroftheprojector.

MEDIASERVER DisplaysuptofourdrivesofacomputerconnectedtoaLAN(setforcon-nectingamediaserver).*Seepage76forsettingupforconnectingamediaserveroftheprojector

PRESENTATION DisplaystheiconwhenaUSBmemoryorsharedfolerstoresindexfiles.

Pathinformation Displaysthelocationofafolderorfile.

Driveinformation [Example]

USB1 314MBFREE/492MB

Displaysthedrive. Displaysfreespaceandcapcityofadrive.(USBonly)

Menuguide Displaysthedescriptionofaselectedmenu.

Operationbuttonguide Displaysinformationaboutoperationbuttons.

*Itisdisplayedinthree-digitnumber(roundingup)

NOTE:WhentheOPTIONSmenuisdisplayed,thedrivelistscreenorthumbnailscreenisnotdisplayed.Todisplayit,selectthe[RETURN]iconandpresstheENTERbutton.

66

4. Using the Viewer

•ThumbnailscreenDisplaysalistoffolders,thumbnails,andiconsinthedriveselectedonthedrivelistscreen.

Menu operation• Usethe▼ or ▲buttontomovethecursorupordown.SelectthemenuitemandpresstheENTERbutton

todisplaythemenuorsettingscreen.

OperationforThumbnailscreen1. Press the ▶ button to move thecursor to the thumbnail screenwhen theOPTIONS menu is not dis-

played.

2. Press the ▼, ▲, ◀, or ▶ button to select a file or folder.

3. PresstheENTERbuttontostartslideshoworplaybackoftheselectedfile.Selectingafolderwilldisplayits thumbnail screen.

Functions

Name Description

UP Goestooneupperlevelmenu.

THUMBNAIL Switchestwodisplaysbetweenthumbnailandicon.

SORTSETTING Rearrangesfoldersorfiles.

DRIVELIST Returnstothedrivelistscreen.

OPTIONS ChangestotheOPTIONSmenu.

SYSTEMSET-TING

Opensthesystemsettingmenu.

Scrollbar Thumbnailscreenwilldisplay12fileswith4by3.Ifthethumbnailscreenhastwelveormorefilesorfolders,thescrollbarwillbedisplayedattherightside.UsingthePAGE▽orPAGE△buttonwillscrollthewholescreendownorup.

Pathinformation Displaysthelocationofafolderorfile.

Thumbnailinformation [Example]

005.jpg 5/200 11/03/201013:25:12 502KB

Selectedfoldernameorfilename

Numbersandorderoffilesinafolder(onlywhenfolderselected)

Create/Changedate:M/D/Y/H/M/B

Displaysfilecapacity

Menuguide Displaysthedescriptionofaselectedmenu.

Operationbuttonguide Displaysinformationaboutoperationbuttons.

TIP:• Ifanunsupportedimageisselected,theicon[?]willbedisplayed,• Themaximumdisplayablenumberofimagesis300inthethumbnailscreenincludingthenumberoffolders.• Ifafilenameorpathofafolderislongerthanspecified,itwillbedisplayedwithcentercharactersorpathskipped. Example:“123456789.jpg”willbedisplayedin“123..789.jpg”.

67

4. Using the Viewer

•Slidescreen(stillimage/movie)Playsafileselectedfromalistofthumbnailsoricons.• ForoperatingaMicrosoftPowerPointfileandAdobePDFfile,seepage62.

Controlbaroperation• Thecontrolbarwillbedisplayedonlywhenastillimage(orindexfile)andamoviefileisselected.

• Thecontrolbarforstillimagesdiffersfromthatformoviefiles.

1. PressingtheENTERbuttoninSlidescreenwilldisplaythecontrolbaratthebottomofthescreen.

2. Use the ◀ or ▶buttontoselectafileandpresstheENTERbutton.

• Theselectedfunctionwillbeexecuted.

Functionsofstillimagecontrolbar

Name Description

PREV Goesbacktothepreviousimage

PLAY Playstheimage.Thisbuttonalsoisusedtostoporstartplayinganimage.

NEXT Goestothenextimage.

RIGHT Rotatestheimage90°clockwise.• Tocancel,selectanotherfolder.

LEFT Rotatestheimage90°counterclockwise.• Tocancel,selectanotherfolder.

SIZE BESTFIT Displays the imagewith itsaspect ratio in theprojector’sdisplayablemaximumresolution.

ACTUALSIZE

Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.

CLOSE Closesthecontrolbar.• YoucanalsopresstheEXITbuttontoclosethecontrolbar.

END Stops playing slides or slideshow, and closes the control bar to return to the thumbnailscreen.

68

4. Using the Viewer

Functionsofmoviecontrolbar

Name Description

PREV Goesbacktothebeginningofamoviefile.• Goesbacktothebeginningofthepreviousmoviefileifexecutedimmediatelyafterbeing

startedplaying.

FR Fast-rewindsamoviefileforabout7seconds.

PLAY/PAUSE PLAY Playsamoviefile.

PAUSE Stopsplayingamoviefile.

FF Fast-forwardsamoviefileforabout7seconds.

NEXT Goestothebeginningofanextmoviefile.

TIME Displaysanelapsedtimeforplaybackorpause.

SIZE BESTFIT Displays the imagewith itsaspect ratio in theprojector’sdisplayablemaximumresolution.

ACTUALSIZE

Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.

CLOSE Closesthecontrolbar.• YoucanalsopresstheEXITbuttontoclosethecontrolbar.

END Stopsplayingamovie,andclosesthecontrolbartoreturntothethumbnailscreen.

69

4. Using the Viewer

Viewer option settings

•SLIDESETTINGSetsstillimagesorslides.

Name Options Description

SCREENSIZE BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithitsaspectratiointheprojector’sdisplay-ablemaximumresolution.

ACTUALSIZE Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.

PLAYMODE MANUAL Selectsmanualplay.

AUTO Selectsautoplay.

INTERVAL 5-300seconds Specifies interval time when [AUTO] is selected for PLAYMODE.

REPEAT Checkmark Turnsonorofftherepeatfunction.

TIP• Toplayoneormoreslides,placethosefilesintoafolder.

70

4. Using the Viewer

•MOVIESETTINGSetsthefunctionsforamoviefile.


SCREENSIZE BESTFIT Displaystheimagewithitsaspectratiointheprojector’sdisplay-ablemaximumresolution.

ACTUALSIZE Displaystheimageinitsactualsize.

REPEAT OFF Turnsonorofftherepeatfunction.

ONEREPEAT Repeatsonefileonly.

ALLREPEAT Repeatsallfilesinthecurrentfolder.

TIP• Turningon[REPEAT]willdisplayblackscreenduringintermissionbetweenmovies.

•AUTOPLAYSETTINGSetsautoplayforslideshowwhenaUSBmemorydevice is inserted into theUSBportof theprojector,orwhen[VIEWER]isselectedfor[SOURCE].


AUTOPLAY OFF —

PICTURE Playsthefirststillimagefoundinadrive.

MOVIE Playsthefirstmoviefoundinadrive.

PowerPoint PlaysthefirstPowerPointfilefoundinadrive.

TIP• Autoplaybehavior isdifferentbetweenwhenaUSBmemorydeviceis insertedintotheUSBportoftheprojectorandwhen[VIEWER]isselectedfor[SOURCE].

• AutoplaystartsforthefirstfoundfilesupportingthefiletypesetupforAutoPlay.Thefilewillbesearchedinthedriverootorlowerlevel.

• When[VIEWER]isselectedfor[SOURCE],thelastselectedfilewillbeautomaticallyplayedifitisfound,orthelastselectedfolderwillbesearchedandthefirstfoundfilewillbeautomaticallyplayed.

ToautomaticallyplayamoviefileinaUSBmemory,storeonemoviefileorchangeitsfilenamesothatitcanbesearchedfirst.

71

4. Using the Viewer

•SORTSETTINGSetstheorderofdisplayingthumbnailsorslides.


SORT NAME(ABC..) Displaysthefilesalphabeticallybynameinascendingorder.

NAME(ZYX..) Displaysthefilesalphabeticallybynameindescendingorder.

EXT.(ABC..) Displays thefilesalphabeticallybyextension inascendingor-der.

EXT.(ZYX..) Displays the files alphabetically by extension in descendingorder.

DATE(NEW) Displaysthefilesinreversechronologicalorder.

DATE(OLD) Displaysthefilesinchronologicalorder.

SIZE(BIG) Displaysthefilesindescendingorderofitsfilesize.

SIZE(SMALL) Displaysthefilesinascendingorderofitsfilesize.

72

4. Using the Viewer

❹ Projecting data from shared folder

LAN

Shared folder

Wireless LAN

Projector

Shared folder

PreparationForprojector:Connecttheprojectortothenetwork.Forcomputer:Placefilestobeprojectedinasharedfolderandnotethefolder’spath.Memorizeorwritedownthepathforlateruse.

• Forsharingafolder,refertoyouruserguideorhelpfileaccompaniedwithyourWindowscomputer.

• Useakeyboardtogiveanametothesharedfolderinalphanumericcharacters.

• Toconnectthesharedfolderbeyondthesubnet,set[WINSCONFIGURATION]in[NETWORKSETTINGS]fromthemenu.

• Digitalsignature(SMBsignature)isnotsupported.

Connecting the projector to the shared folder 1. PresstheVIEWERbuttonontheremotecontrol.

The drive list window will be displayed.

• AnotherwaytostarttheVIEWERistopresstheSOURCEbuttonafewtimesontheprojectorcabinet.(→ page 16)

73

4. Using the Viewer

2. Displaysthe[OPTIONS]menu.

Press the ▼ button to select the (OPTIONS) icon and press the ENTER button.

• WhentheOPTIONSmenuisdisplayed,thedrivelistwillnotbedisplayed.

3. Displaythe[SHAREDFOLDERSETTING]screen.

Press the ▼ button to select the (SHARED FOLDER SETTING) icon and press the ENETR button.

4. Select a folder number and place to enable it.

Press the ◀ or ▶ button to a shared folder number and press the ▼ button to select [ENABLE] , and then press the ENTER button.

5. Enterthepath,username,andpasswordforthesharedfolder.

Press the ▼ button to select the [SHARED FOLDER] field. The software keyboard will be displayed.

For using the software keyboard, see page 131.

• Ifyourcomputerisnotpasswordprotected,enteringapasswordisnotrequired.

• Uptofoursharedfolderscanbeadded.

• Themaximumlengthofapathofthesharedfoldermustbe15alphanumericcharactersforcomputernameand23 alphanumeric characters for folder name.

74

4. Using the Viewer

6. Exitthesetting.

Press the ▼ button to select [OK] and press the ENTER button.

This will close the [SHARED FOLDER] screen.

• Ifanerrormessageappear,yoursettingsarenotcorrect.Tryagain.

75

4. Using the Viewer

Disconnecting the shared folder from the projector

• Disablethenumberofasharedfolderyouwishtodisconnect

Press the ▼ button to select [ENABLE] and press the ENTER button to clear it.

NOTE:• WhenaPowerPointfileorPDFfileisdisplayed,donotdisconnectyourLANcable.Ifdoingso,theViewerwillnotwork.

TIP:• ConnectingsettingsforSharedfolder Settingsofuptofourfolderscanbesaved. Restartingtheprojectorwilldisplaysetting-savedsharedfoldersingreyfoldericononthedrivelistscreen. Selectingthegreyiconfolderwillskipentryforafolderpath.• Failingtoconnectwithasharedfolderwilldisplaythefoldericonwith“x”mark.Ifthishappen,checkyourfoldersetting.

76

4. Using the Viewer

❺ Projecting data from media server

LAN

Media server

Media server

Wireless LAN

Media server

Projector

PreparationForprojector:Connecttheprojectortothenetwork.Forcomputer:Prepareimagefilesormoviefilestobeprojected,andsetup“MediaSharing”inWindowsMediaPlayer11orWindowsMediaPlayer12.

NOTE: • Boththeprojectorandthemediaservermustbeonthesamesubnet.Connectingtothemediaserverbeyondthesubnetisnot

possible.• TypesofimagesandmovieswhichcanbesharedmayvarydependingonWindowsversion.

Setting up “Media Sharing” in Windows Media Player 111. StartWindowsMediaPlayer11.

2. Select“MediaSharing”from“Library”.

The “Media Sharing” dialog box will be displayed.

77

4. Using the Viewer

3. Select“Sharemymedia”checkbox,andthenselectOK.

A list of accessible devices will be displayed.

4. Select“PA600Series”andthen“Allow”.

A check mark will be added to the “PA600 Series” icon.

• The“PA600Series”isaprojectornamespecifiedin[NETWORKSETTINGS].

5. Select“OK”.

This will make pictures and video in “Library” available from the projector.

78

4. Using the Viewer

Setting up “Media Sharing” in Windows Media Player 121. StartWindowsMediaPlayer12.

2. Select“Stream”,andthenselect“Automaticallyallowdevicestoplaymymedia”.

The “Allow All Media Devices” windows will be displayed.

3. Select“Automaticallyallowallcomputersandmediadevices”.

Graphics and movie files in “Library” can be used from the projector.

79

4. Using the Viewer

Connecting the projector to the media serverPresstheVIEWERbuttonontheremotecontrol.TheVIEWERwillstart.

• AnotherwaytostarttheVIEWERistopresstheSOURCEbuttonafewtimesontheprojectorcabinet.(→page16)

• Thiswillstartsearchingforacomputerwith“mediasharing”enabledinthenetworkandaddittothe“Mediaserver”ofthethumbnailscreen.

Anotherwaytodothisistopointthecursorto“Mediaserver”andselect[REFRESH]fromthethumbnailmenuandpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE: • Uptofouraccessiblemediaserverscanbeautomaticallysearchedanddisplayed.Thefifthdeviceorlatercannotbedisplayed.

(→page60)

80

4. Using the Viewer

Disconnecting the projector from the media server1. DisplaytheOPTIONSmenu.

Press the ▼ button to select the [OPTIONS] icon and select the ENTER button.

2. DisplaytheMEDIASERVERsettingscreen.

Press the ▼ button to select the MEDIA SERVER icon and press the ENTER button.

3. Disabletheconnection.

Press the ENTER button to clear the checkmark to disable the connection.

Press the ▼ button to select [OK] and press the ENTER button to close the MEDIA SERVER setting screen.

81

4. Using the Viewer

❻ Restrictions on displaying files

TheViewerallowsyoutogiveasimplifieddisplayofaPowerPointfileorPDFfile.Duetosimplifieddisplay,however,actualdisplaymaybedifferentfromtheoneonyourcomputerapplicationpro-gram.

Some restrictions on PowerPoint files

• Fontswillbeautomaticallyconvertedtothefontsinstalledintheprojector.Fontscanvaryinsizeorwidth,causinglayoutcorruption

Somecharactersorfontsmaynotbedisplayed.

• Somefunctionsincludedinfontarenotsupported.

Example:Therearesomerestrictionsonanimation,selection,orhyperlink.

• Itmaytakelongertimetofeedpagescomparedwithacomputer

• InsomecasesMicrosoftPowerPoint97-2003formatfilesmaynotbedisplayed.

Some restrictions on PDF files

• FontsnotembeddedatthetimeofPDFcreationmaynotbedisplayed.

• Somefunctionsincludedinfontarenotsupported.

Example:Therearesomerestrictionsonannotations,selection,form,orcolorspace.

• Itmaytakelongertimetofeedpagescomparedwithacomputer

• InsomecasesAdobeAcrobatformatfilesmaynotbedisplayed.

82

5. Using On-Screen Menu1 Using the Menus

NOTE:Theon-screenmenumaynotbedisplayedcorrectlywhileinterlacedmotionvideoimageisprojected.

1. PresstheMENUbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythemenu.

NOTE:Thecommandssuchas ENTER,EXIT,, inthebottomshowavailablebuttonsforyouroperation.

2. Press the buttonsontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythesubmenu.

3. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettohighlightthetopitemorthefirsttab.

4. Use the buttonsontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettoselecttheitemyouwanttoadjustorset.

Youcanusethebuttonsontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettoselectthetabyouwant.

5. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettodisplaythesubmenuwindow.

6. Adjustthelevelorturntheselecteditemonoroffbyusingthe buttons on the remote control or the projector cabinet.

Changesarestoreduntiladjustedagain.

7. Repeatsteps2-6toadjustanadditionalitem,orpresstheEXITbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojec-torcabinettoquitthemenudisplay.

NOTE:Whenamenuormessageisdisplayed,severallinesofinformationmaybelost,dependingonthesignalorsettings.

8.PresstheMENUbuttontoclosethemenu.

Toreturntothepreviousmenu,presstheEXITbutton.

83

5. Using On-Screen Menu

Menu ElementsSlide bar

Solid triangle

Menu mode

Tab

Radio button

High Altitude symbol

ECO mode symbol

Wireless symbol

Menuwindowsordialogboxestypicallyhavethefollowingelements:

Highlight �� Indicates the selected menu or item� Solid triangle �� Indicates further choices are available� A highlighted triangle indicates the item is active� Tab �� Indicates a group of features in a dialog box� Selecting on any tab brings its page to the front�Radio button ��Use this round button to select an option in a dialog box�Source �� Indicates the currently selected source�Menu mode �� Indicates the current menu mode: BASIC or ADVANCED�Off Timer remaining time �� Indicates the remaining countdown time when the [OFF TIMER] is preset�Slide bar �� Indicates settings or the direction of adjustment�ECO mode symbol �� Indicates [ECO MODE] is set�Key Lock symbol �� Indicates the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is enabled�Thermometer symbol �� Indicates the [ECO MODE] is forcibly set to [ON] mode because the internal temperature is too

high�High Altitude symbol �� Indicates the [FAN MODE] is set to [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode�Wireless symbol �� Indicate the wireless LAN connection is enabled�

Source

Available buttons

Thermometer symbol

Key Lock symbol

Off Timer remaining time

Highlight

84


List of Menu ItemsSomemenuitemsarenotavailabledependingontheinputsource.MenuItem Default Options

SOURCE

COMPUTER1 *COMPUTER2 *COMPUTER3(BNC) *HDMI *DisplayPort *VIDEO *S-VIDEO *VIEWER *NETWORK *ENTRYLISTTESTPATTERN

ADJUST

PICTURE

MODE STANDARD STANDARD,PROFESSIONAL

PRESET * HIGH-BRIGHT,PRESENTATION,VIDEO,MOVIE,GRAPHIC,sRGB,DICOMSIM.

DETAILSETTINGS

GENERAL

REFERENCE * HIGH-BRIGHT,PRESENTATION,VIDEO,MOVIE,GRAPHIC,sRGB,DICOMSIM.

GAMMACORRECTION*1 DYNAMIC,NATURAL,BLACKDETAIL

SCREENSIZE*2 * LARGE,MEDIUM,SMALLCOLORTEMPERATURE*3 * 5000,6500,7800,8500,9300,10500

DYNAMICCONTRAST * OFF,ON

WHITEBALANCECONTRASTR 0CONTRASTG 0CONTRASTB 0BRIGHTNESSR 0BRIGHTNESSG 0BRIGHTNESSB 0

COLORCORRECTIONRED 0GREEN 0BLUE 0YELLOW 0MAGENTA 0CYAN 0

CONTRAST 50BRIGHTNESS 50SHARPNESS 10COLOR 50HUE 0RESET

IMAGEOPTIONS

CLOCK *PHASE *HORIZONTAL *VERTICAL *OVERSCAN * AUTO,0[%],5[%],10[%]

ASPECTRATIO

* (COMPUTER1/2/3)AUTO,4:3,5:4,16:9,15:9,16:10,NATIVE

* (COMPONENT/VIDEO/S-VIDEO)AUTO,4:3,LETTERBOX,WIDESCREEN,ZOOM

* (COMPONENT/VIDEO/S-VIDEO)AUTO,4:3WINDOW,LETTERBOX,WIDESCREEN,4:3FILL

RESOLUTION * –

VIDEO

NOISEREDUCTION

RANDOMNR * OFF,LOW,MEDIUM,HIGHMOSQUITONR OFF OFF,LOW,MEDIUM,HIGHBLOCKNR OFF OFF,ON

DEINTERLACE AUTO AUTO,VIDEO,FILM3DY/CSEPARATION ON OFF,ONDETAILENHANCEMENT *SIGNALTYPE RGB RGB,COMPONENTVIDEOLEVEL AUTO AUTO,NORMAL,ENHANCED

* Theasterisk(*)indicatesthatthedefaultsettingvariesdependingonthesignal.*1 The[GAMMACORRECTION]itemisavailablewhenanitemotherthan[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].*2 The[SCREENSIZE]itemisavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[REFERENCE].*3 When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],the[COLORTEMPERATURE]isnotavailable.

•Basicmenuitemsareindicatedbyshadedarea.

85


SETUP

BASIC

KEYSTONEHORIZONTAL 0VERTICAL 0

CORNERSTONE

PIP/PICTURE BY PICTURE

PIP/PBP MODE PIP PIP, PICTURE BY PICTUREPIP POSITION BOTTOM-RIGHT TOP-LEFT, TOP-RIGHT, BOTTOM-LEFT, BOTTOM-RIGHTPIP/PBP SOURCE OFF OFF, VIDEO, S-VIDEO

WALL COLOR OFFOFF, WHITEBOARD, BLACKBOARD, BLACKBOARD (GRAY), LIGHT YELLOW, LIGHT GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, SKY BLUE, LIGHT ROSE, PINK

ECO MODE OFF OFF, ON

CLOSED CAPTION OFF OFF, CAPTION1, CAPTION2, CAPTION3, CAPTION4, TEXT1, TEXT2, TEXT3, TEXT4

OFF TIMER OFF OFF, 0:30, 1:00, 2:00, 4:00, 8:00, 12:00, 16:00

TOOLS ADMINISTRATOR MODE, PROGRAM TIMER, TIME, MOUSE

LANGUAGE ENGLISH

ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, FRANÇAIS, ITALIANO, ESPAÑOL, SVENSKA, 日本語DANSK, PORTUGUÊS, ČEŠTINA, MAGYAR, POLSKI, NEDERLANDS, SUOMINORSK, TÜRKÇE, РУССКИЙ, , Ελληνικά, 中文, 한국어ROMÂNĂ, HRVATSKA, БЪЛГАРСКИ, INDONESIA, हिन्दी, ไทย

MENU

COLOR SELECT COLOR COLOR, MONOCHROMESOURCE DISPLAY ON OFF, ONMESSAGE DISPLAY ON OFF, ONID DISPLAY ON OFF, ONECO MESSAGE OFF OFF, ONDISPLAY TIME AUTO 45 SEC MANUAL, AUTO 5 SEC, AUTO 15 SEC, AUTO 45 SECBACKGROUND BLUE BLUE, BLACK, LOGOFILTER MESSAGE OFF OFF, 100[H], 500[H], 1000[H], 2000[H]

INSTALLATION (1)

ORIENTATION DESKTOP FRONT

DESKTOP FRONT, CEILING REAR, DESKTOP REAR, CEILING FRONT

SCREENSCREEN TYPE 4:3 SCREEN 4:3 SCREEN, 16:9 SCREEN, 16:10 SCREENPOSITION (PA600X/PA500X) 0

GEOMETRIC CORRECTION OFF OFF, 1, 2, 3

MULTI-SCREEN COMP.

MODE OFF OFF, ONCONTRAST 0BRIGHTNESS 0

REF. WHITE BALANCE

CONTRAST R 0CONTRAST G 0CONTRAST B 0BRIGHTNESS R 0BRIGHTNESS G 0BRIGHTNESS B 0UNIFORMITY R 0UNIFORMITY B 0

STATIC CONVERGENCE(PA500U only)

HORIZONTAL R 0HORIZONTAL G 0HORIZONTAL B 0VERTICAL R 0VERTICAL R 0VERTICAL B 0

INSTALLATION (2)

NETWORK SETTINGSWIRED LAN, WIRELESS LAN, WPS, NETWORK INFORMATION, PROJECTOR NAME, DOMAIN, ALERT MAIL, NETWORK SERVICE

CONTROL PANEL LOCK OFF OFF, ONSECURITY OFF OFF, ONCOMMUNICATION SPEED 38400bps 4800bps, 9600bps, 19200bps, 38400bps, 115200bpsREMOTE SENSOR FRONT/BACK FRONT/BACK, FRONT, BACK

CONTROL IDCONTROL ID NUMBER 1 1–254CONTROL ID OFF OFF, ON

OPTIONS(1)

AUTO ADJUST NORMAL OFF, NORMAL, FINE

FAN MODEAUTO MODE: AUTO, HIGH, HIGH ALTITUDE

NORMAL SETTING: NORMAL, VERTICAL TILT UP

SIGNAL SELECT(COMP3) RGB/COMPONENT RGB/COMPONENT, VIDEO

SEAMLESS SWITCHING(PA500U only) OFF OFF, ON

COLOR SYSTEM

VIDEO AUTO AUTO, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM

S-VIDEO AUTO AUTO, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60, SECAM

COMPUTER3 (VIDEO) AUTO AUTO, NTSC3.58, NTSC4.43, PAL, PAL-M, PAL-N, PAL60,

SECAMDIGITAL AUDIO SELECT

HDMI HDMI HDMI, COMPUTER2DisplayPort DisplayPort DisplayPort, COMPUTER2

BEEP ON OFF, ON

* The asterisk (*) indicates that the default setting varies depending on the signal.

86


SETUP OPTIONS(2)

STANDBY MODE NORMAL NORMAL, POWER-SAVING, NETWORK STANDBYDIRECT POWER ON OFF OFF, ONAUTO POWER ON(COMP1/3) OFF OFF, COMPUTER1, COMPUTER3AUTO POWER OFF OFF OFF, 0:05, 0:10, 0:20, 0:30

DEFAULT SOURCE SELECT LAST LAST, AUTO, COMPUTER1, COMPUTER2, COMPUTER3, HDMI, DisplayPort, VIDEO, S-VIDEO, VIEWER, NETWORK

INFO.

USAGE TIME

LAMP LIFE REMAININGLAMP HOURS USEDFILTER HOURS USEDTOTAL CARBON SAVINGS

SOURCE(1)

INPUT TERMINALRESOLUTIONHORIZONTAL FREQUENCYVERTICAL FREQUENCYSYNC TYPESYNC POLARITYSCAN TYPESOURCE NAMEENTRY NO.

SOURCE(2)

SIGNAL TYPEVIDEO TYPEBIT DEPTHVIDEO LEVELLINK RATELINK LANE

WIRED LAN

IP ADDRESSSUBNET MASKGATEWAYMAC ADDRESS

WIRELESS LAN(1)

IP ADDRESSSUBNET MASKGATEWAYMAC ADDRESS

WIRELESS LAN(2)

SSIDNETWORK TYPEWEP/WPACHANNELSIGNAL LEVEL

VERSION (1)

FIRMWAREDATAFIRMWARE2SUB-CPU

VERSION (2) FIRMWARE3

OTHERS

PROJECTOR NAMEMODEL NO.SERIAL NUMBERLAN UNIT TYPECONTROL ID (when [CONTROL ID] is set)

RESET

CURRENT SIGNALALL DATAALL DATA(INCLUDING ENTRY LIST)CLEAR LAMP HOURSCLEAR FILTER HOURS

87


4 Menu Descriptions & Functions [SOURCE]

COMPUTER 1, 2, and 3Selects the computer connected to your COMPUTER 1, 2, or COMPUTER 3 input connector signal.NOTE: When the component input signal is connected to the COMPUTER 1 IN, COMPUTER 2 IN, or COMPUTER 3 IN connector, select [COMPUTER1], [COMPUTER2] or [COMPUTER3] respectively. The projector automatically determines whether the COMPUTER1, 2, or 3 input signal is an RGB or component signal.

HDMISelects the HDMI compatible equipment connected to your HDMI IN connector.

DisplayPortProjects the image of the device connected to the DisplayPort input connector.

VIDEOSelects what is connected to your VIDEO input-VCR, DVD player or document camera.

S-VIDEOSelects what is connected to your S-VIDEO input-VCR or DVD player.NOTE: A frame may freeze for a brief period of time when a video is played back in fast-forward or fast-rewind with a Video or S-Video source.

VIEWERThis feature enables you to make presentations using a USB memory that contains slides.(→ page 56 “4. Using the Viewer”)

NETWORKSelects a signal from the LAN port (RJ-45) or the installed USB wireless LAN unit (optional for models for Europe, Australia, Asia and other countries than North America).

ENTRY LISTDisplays a list of signals. See the following pages.

TEST PATTERNCloses the menu and switches to the test pattern screen. The previous screen reappears when the EXIT button is pressed.

88


UsingtheEntryListWhenanysourceadjustmentsaremade,theadjustmentsareautomaticallyregisteredintheEntryList.The(adjustmentvaluesof)registeredsignalscanbeloadedfromtheEntryListwhenevernecessary.However,onlyupto100patternscanberegisteredintheEntryList.When100patternshavebeenregisteredintheEntryList,anerrormessageisthendisplayedandnoadditionalpatternscanberegistered.Youshouldthusdelete(adjustmentvaluesof)signalsthatarenolongerneeded.

DisplayingtheEntrylist1. PresstheMENUbutton.


2. Press the or buttontoselect[SOURCE].

The SOURCE list will be displayed.

3. Use the , , , or toselect[ENTRYLIST]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The ENTRY LIST windows will be displayed.

If the ENTRY LIST window is not displayed, switch the menu to [ADVANCED].

To switch the menu between [ADVANCED] and [BASIC], select [APPLICATION MENU] → [TOOLS] → [ADMINISTRATOR MODE]. (→ page 136)

89


EnteringthecurrentlyprojectedsignalintotheEntryList[STORE]

1. Press the or buttontoselectanynumber.

2. Press the or buttontoselect[STORE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

CallingupasignalfromtheEntryList[LOAD]Pressthe or buttontoselectasignalandpresstheENTERbutton.

EditingasignalfromtheEntryList[EDIT]

1. Press the or buttontoselectasignalyouwishtoedit.

2. Press the , , , or buttontoselect[EDIT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The Edit window will be displayed.

SOURCENAME Enterasignalname.Upto18alphanumericcharacterscanbeused.INPUTTERMINAL Selecttheinputsource.LOCK Setso that theselectedsignalcannotbedeletedwhen [ALLDELETE] isexecuted.The

changesmadeafterLOCKexecutioncannotbesaved.SKIP Setsothattheselectedsignalwillbeskippedduringautosearch.

3. Settheaboveitemsandselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE:Theinputterminalcannotbechangedtothecurrentlyprojectedsignal.

90


CuttingasignalfromtheEntryList[CUT]

1. Press the or buttontoselectasignalyouwishtodelete.

2. Press the , , , or buttontoselect[CUT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The signal will be deleted from the Entry List and the deleted signal will be displayed on the clipboard at the bottom of the Entry List.

NOTE:• Thecurrentlyprojectedsignalcannotbedeleted.• Whenthelockedsignalisselected,itwillbedisplayedingraywhichindicatesitisnotavailable.

TIP:• DataontheclipboardcanbepassedontotheEntryList.• DataontheclipboardwillnotbelostaftertheEntryListisclosed.

CopyingandpastingasignalfromtheEntryList[COPY]/[PASTE]

1. Press the or buttontoselectasignalyouwishtocopy.

2. Press the , , , or buttontoselect[COPY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The copied signal will be displayed on the clipboard at the bottom of the Entry List.

3. Press the or button to move to the list.

4. Press the or button to select a signal.

5. Press the , , , or buttontoselect[PASTE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Data on the clipboard will be pasted to the signal.

DeletingallthesignalsfromtheEntryList[ALLDELTE]

1. Press the , , , or buttontoselect[ALLDELETE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The confirmation message will be displayed.

2. Press the or buttontoselect[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE:Thelockedsignalcannotbedeleted.

91


Menu Descriptions & Functions [ADJUST][PICTURE]

[MODE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutodeterminehowtosavesettingsfor[DETAILSETTINGS]of[PRESET]foreachinput.

STANDARD �� Saves settings for each item of [PRESET] (Preset 1 through 7)PROFESSIONAL �� Saves all the settings of [PICTURE] for each input�

[PRESET]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectoptimizedsettingsforyourprojectedimage.Youcanadjustneutraltintforyellow,cyanormagenta.Therearesevenfactorypresetsoptimizedforvarioustypesofimages.Youcanalsouse[DETAILSETTINGS]tosetuseradjustablesettingstocustomizeeachgammaorcolor.Yoursettingscanbestoredin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].

HIGH-BRIGHT �� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�PRESENTATION �� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�VIDEO �� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�MOVIE �� Recommended for movies�GRAPHIC �� Recommended for graphics�sRGB �� Standard color valuesDICOM SIM� �� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�

NOTE: • The[DICOMSIM.]optionisfortraining/referenceonlyandshouldnotbeusedforactualdiagnosis.• DICOMstandsforDigitalImagingandCommunicationsinMedicine.ItisastandarddevelopedbytheAmericanCollegeofRadiol-ogy(ACR)andtheNationalElectricalManufacturersAssociation(NEMA).

Thestandardspecifieshowdigitalimagedatacanbemovedfromsystemtosystem.

[DETAIL SETTINGS]

92


[GENERAL]StoringYourCustomizedSettings[REFERENCE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutostoreyourcustomizedsettingsin[PRESET1]to[PRESET7].First,selectabasepresetmodefrom[REFERENCE],thenset[GAMMACORRECTION]and[COLORTEMPERA-TURE].

HIGH-BRIGHT �� Recommended for use in a brightly lit room�PRESENTATION �� Recommended for making a presentation using a PowerPoint file�VIDEO �� Recommended for typical TV program viewing�MOVIE �� Recommended for movies�GRAPHIC �� Recommended for graphics�sRGB �� Standard color values�DICOM SIM� �� Recommended for DICOM simulation format�

SelectingGammaCorrectionMode[GAMMACORRECTION]Eachmodeisrecommendedfor:

DYNAMIC �� Creates a high-contrast picture�NATURAL �� Natural reproduction of the picture�BLACK DETAIL �� Emphasizes detail in dark areas of the picture�

NOTE:Thisfunctionisnotavailablewhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].

SelectingScreenSizeforDICOMSIM[SCREENSIZE]Thisfunctionwillperformgammacorrectionappropriateforthescreensize.

LARGE �� For screen size of 150"MEDIUM �� For screen size of 100"SMALL �� For screen size of 50"

NOTE:Thisfunctionisavailableonlywhen[DICOMSIM.]isselectedfor[DETAILSETTINGS].

AdjustingColorTemperature[COLORTEMPERATURE]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthecolortemperatureofyourchoice.

NOTE:When[PRESENTATION]or[HIGH-BRIGHT]isselectedin[REFERENCE],thisfunctionisnotavailable.

AdjustingBrightnessandContrast[DYNAMICCONTRAST]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoadjustthecontrastratioopticallyusingthebuilt-iniris.Toincreasethecontrastratio,select[ON].

AdjustingWhiteBalance[WHITEBALANCE]Thisallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalance.Contrastforeachcolor(RGB)toadjustthewhitelevelofthescreen;Brightnessforeachcolor(RGB)isusedtoadjusttheblacklevelofthescreen.

93


[COLOR CORRECTION]Correctsthecolorforallsignals.Adjuststhetoneforthecolorsred,green,blue,yellow,magentaandcyan.

RED �� Adjusts the color in red areas, centered around the red�This can be used to adjust to a yellow- or magenta-tinged red�

GREEN �� Adjusts the color in green areas, centered around the green�This can be used to adjust to a yellow- or cyan-tinged green�

BLUE �� Adjusts the color in blue areas, centered around the blue�This can be used to adjust to a violet- or cyan-tinged blue�

YELLOW �� Adjusts the color in yellow areas, centered around the yellow�This can be used to adjust to a red- or green-tinged yellow�

MAGENTA �� Adjusts the color in magenta areas, centered around the magenta�This can be used to adjust to a red- or blue-tinged magenta�

CYAN �� Adjusts the color in cyan areas, centered around the cyan�This can be used to adjust to a green- or blue-tinged cyan�

[CONTRAST]Adjuststheintensityoftheimageaccordingtotheincomingsignal.

[BRIGHTNESS]Adjuststhebrightnesslevelorthebackrasterintensity.

[SHARPNESS]Controlsthedetailoftheimage.

[COLOR]Increasesordecreasesthecolorsaturationlevel.

[HUE]Variesthecolorlevelfrom+/−greento+/−blue.Theredlevelisusedasreference.

Inputsignal CONTRAST BRIGHTNESS SHARPNESS COLOR HUE

COMPUTER/DisplayPort/HDMI(RGB) Yes Yes Yes No No

COMPUTER/DisplayPort/HDMI(COMPONENT)

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

VIDEO/S-VIDEO/COMPONENT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

VIEWER/NETWORK Yes Yes Yes No No

Yes=Adjustable,No=Notadjustable

[RESET]Thesettingsandadjustmentsfor[PICTURE]willbereturnedtothefactorysettingswiththeexceptionofthefollowing;Presetnumbersand[REFERENCE]withinthe[PRESET]screen.Thesettingsandadjustmentsunder[DETAILSETTINGS]withinthe[PRESET]screenthatarenotcurrentlyselectedwillnotbereset.

94


[IMAGE OPTIONS]

AdjustingClockandPhase[CLOCK/PHASE]ThisallowsyoutomanuallyadjustCLOCKandPHASE.

CLOCK �� Use this item to fine tune the computer image or to remove any vertical banding that might appear� This function adjusts the clock frequencies that eliminate the horizontal banding in the image�This adjustment may be necessary when you connect your computer for the first time�

PHASE �� Use this item to adjust the clock phase or to reduce video noise, dot interference or cross talk� (This is evident when part of your image appears to be shimmering�)Use [PHASE] only after the [CLOCK] is complete�

NOTE:The[CLOCK]and[PHASE]itemsareavailableforRGBsignalsonly.

95


AdjustingHorizontal/VerticalPosition[HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL]Adjuststheimagelocationhorizontallyandvertically.

NOTE:The[HORIZONTAL]and[VERTICAL]itemsarenotavailableforVIDEO,S-VIDEO,HDMI,VIEWERandNETWORK.

- Animagecanbedistortedduringtheadjustmentof[CLOCK]and[PHASE].Thisisnotmalfunction.

- Theadjustments for [CLOCK], [PHASE], [HORIZONTAL],and[VERTICAL]willbestored inmemoryfor thecurrentsignal.Thenexttimeyouprojectthesignalwiththesameresolution,horizontalandverticalfrequency,itsadjustmentswillbecalledupandapplied.

Todeleteadjustmentsstoredinmemory,fromthemenu,youselect[RESET]→[CURRENTSIGNAL]andresettheadjustments.

[BLANKING]Adjuststhedisplayrange(blanking)atthetop,bottom,leftandrightedgesoftheinputsignal.

SelectingOverscanPercentage[OVERSCAN]Selectoverscanpercentage(Auto,0%,5%and10%)forsignal.

Projected image

Overscaned by 10%

NOTE: • The[OVERSCAN]itemisnotavailable: -when[NATIVE]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]. -when[VIEWER]or[NETWORK]isselectedfor[SOURCE]

96


SelectingtheAspectRatio[ASPECTRATIO]Usethisfunctiontoselectthescreen’svertical:horizontalaspectratio.Selectthescreentype(4:3screen,16:9screenor16:10screen)atthescreensettingbeforesettingtheaspectratio.(→page104)Theprojectorautomaticallyidentifiesthesignalbeinginputandsetstheoptimumaspectratio.

ForComputersignal

ForComponent/Video/S-VideosignalsWhenthescreentypeissetto4:3 Whenthescreentypeissetto16:9or16:10

Resolution AspectRatioVGA 640×480 4:3SVGA 800×600 4:3XGA 1024×768 4:3WXGA 1280×768 15:9WXGA 1280×800 16:10HD(FWXGA) 1366×768 approx.16:9WXGA+ 1440×900 16:10SXGA 1280×1024 5:4SXGA+ 1400×1050 4:3WXGA+ 1600×900 16:9UXGA 1600×1200 4:3WSXGA+ 1680×1050 16:9FHD(1080P) 1920×1080 16:9WUXGA 1920×1200 16:10

Options FunctionAUTO Theprojectorwillautomaticallydeterminetheincomingsignalanddisplayitinitsaspectratio.

Theprojectormayerroneouslydeterminetheaspectratiodependingonitssignal.Ifthisoccurs,selecttheappropriateaspectratiofromthefollowing.

4:3 Theimageisdisplayedin4:3aspectratio.5:4 Theimageisdisplayedin5:4aspectratio16:9 Theimageisdisplayedin16:9aspectratio15:9 Theimageisdisplayedin15:9aspectratio16:10 Theimageisdisplayedin16:10aspectratioNATIVE Theprojectordisplaysthecurrentimageinitstrueresolutionwhentheincomingcomputersignal

hasalowerorhigherresolutionthantheprojector’snativeresolution.(→page2)Whentheincomingcomputersignalhasahigherresolutionthantheprojector'snativeresolution,thecenterofanimagewillbedisplayed.

97


LETTERBOX Theimageofaletterboxsignal(16:9)isstretchedequallyinthehorizontalandverticaldirectionstofitthescreen.

WIDESCREEN Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin16:9.

ZOOM Theimageofasqueezesignal(16:9)isstretchedleftandrightin4:3.Partsofthedisplayedimagearecroppedattheleftandrightedgesandthereforenotvisible.

4:3FILL Theimageofasignal(4:3)isstretchedleftandrightin16:9.

TIP:• Imagepositioncanbeadjustedverticallyusing[POSITION]whenthe[16:9],[15:9],or[16:10]aspectratiosareselected.• Theterm“letterbox”referstoamorelandscape-orientedimagewhencomparedtoa4:3image,whichisthestandardaspectratioforavidesource.

Theletterboxsignalhasaspectratioswiththevistasize“1.85:1”orcinemascopesize“2.35:1”formoviefilm.• Theterm“squeeze”referstothecompressedimageofwhichaspectratioisconvertedfrom16:9to4:3.

[RESOLUTION]Thisfunctionsetstheresolutionofaprojectedimageifauto-detectfailstoworkwell.

98


[VIDEO]

UsingNoiseReduction[NOISEREDUCTION]Thisfunctionisusedtoreducevideonoise.

RANDOM NR �� Reduces flickering random noise in an image� MOSQUITO NR �� Reduces mosquito noise that appears around the edges of an image during DVD playback�BLOCK NR �� Reduces block noise or mosaic-like patterns by selecting ON�

SelectingInterlacedProgressiveConversionProcessMode[DEINTERLACE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoselectaninterlaced-to-progressiveconversionprocessforvideosignals.

AUTO �� Determines an appropriate interlaced-to-progressive conversion process automatically�VIDEO �� Applies a normal interlaced-to-progressive conversion process�FILM �� Applies the automatic detection mode for telecine signals� This option is recommended for a movie pic-

ture�

NOTE:ThisfunctionisnotavailablewithRGBsignals.

TurningOnorOffthe3DDimensionalSeparation[3DY/CSEPARATION]WhenprojectinganimagefromaVIDEOinput,settoONtoprojectthehighestqualityimage.

OFF �� Turns off the 3 dimensional separation feature�ON �� Turns on the 3 dimensional separation feature�

NOTE:OnlyavailableforNTSC3.58videosignals.

[DETAIL ENHANCEMENT]Thisfunctionenhancesthecontoursoftheimagewhenprojectingcomponentsignals.

[SIGNAL TYPE]TheprojectorautomaticallyidentifieswhethertheCOMPUTER1,COMPUTER2orCOMPUTER3*inputsignalsareRGBorcomponentsignalstoprojecttheimage.Ifthecolorsareunnatural,however,tryswitchingthesetting.*ForCOMPUTER3,thecomputersignalandvideosignalcanbeselectedatSIGNALSELECT(COMP3).

RGB �� Switches to the RGB input�COMPONENT �� Switches to the component signal input�

99


[VIDEOLEVEL]Thisfunctionselectsvideosignallevelwhentheprojector’sHDMIandDisplayPortinputconnectorsandanexternaldeviceareconnected.

AUTO �� The video level is switched automatically based on the information from the device outputting the signal�Depending on the connected device, this setting may not be made properly� In this case, switch to “NORMAL” or “ENHANCED” from the menu and view with the optimum setting�

NORMAL �� This disables the enhanced mode�ENHANCED �� This improves the image’s contrast, expressing the dark and light sections more dynamically�

100


Menu Descriptions & Functions [SETUP]

[BASIC]

CorrectingVerticalKeystoneDistortionManually[KEYSTONE]Youcancorrectverticaldistortionmanually.(→page22)

TIP:Whenthisoptionishighlighted,pressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplayitsslidebarforadjustment.

SelectingCornerstoneMode[CORNERSTONE]

Thisoptionallowsyoutocorrecttrapezoidaldistortion.SelectingthisitemwilldisplaytheCornerstoneadjustmentscreen.(→page32)

NOTE:The[CORNERSTONE]itemisnotavailablewhen[KEYSTONE]or[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]isselected.

UsingthePIP/PICTUREBYPICTUREFunction[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]Thisfunctionallowsyoutoviewtwodifferentsignalssimultaneously.(→page35)

MODE:Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecttwomodes:PIPandPICTUREBYPICTURE.PIP:Thisoptionallowsyoutoviewasubpictureinthemainpicture.PICTUREBYPICTURE:Thisallowsyoutoviewtwopicturessidebyside.

POSITION:When[PIP]isselectedfor[MODE],thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthepositionofasubpictureinthemainpic-ture.Theoptionsare:TOP-LEFT,TOP-RIGHT,BOTTOMLEFT,andBOTTOMRIGHT.

NOTE:The[POSITION]cannotbeselectedwhen[PICTUREBYPICTURE]isselected.

101


SOURCE:Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectasubpicturesignal.Theoptionsare:OFF,VIDEOandS-VIDEO.Selecting[OFF]willcancelthePIP/PICTUREBYPICTUREmodeandreturntothenormalscreen.

UsingtheWallColorCorrection[WALLCOLOR]

Thisfunctionallowsforquickadaptivecolorcorrectioninapplicationswherethescreenmaterialisnotwhite.

NOTE:Selecting[WHITEBOARD]reduceslampbrightness.

SettingEcoMode[ECOMODE]TheECOMODEincreaseslamplife,whileloweringpowerconsumptionandcuttingdownonCO2emissions.Twobrightnessmodesofthelampcanbeselected:[OFF]and[ON]modes.(→page28)

SettingClosedCaption[CLOSEDCAPTION]ThisoptionsetsseveralclosedcaptionmodesthatallowtexttobesuperimposedontheprojectedimageofVideoorS-Video.

OFF �� This exits the closed caption mode�CAPTION 1-4 �� Text is superimposed�TEXT 1-4 �� Text is displayed�

UsingOffTimer[OFFTIMER]1. Selectyourdesiredtimebetween30minutesand16hours:OFF,0:30,1:00,2:00,4:00,8:00,12:00,16:00.

2. PresstheENTERbuttonontheremotecontrol.

3. Theremainingtimestartscountingdown.

4. Theprojectorwillturnoffafterthecountdowniscomplete.

NOTE:• Tocancelthepresettime,set[OFF]forthepresettimeorturnoffthepower.• Whentheremainingtimereaches3minutesbeforetheprojectoristurnedoff,the[THEPROJECTORWILLTURNOFFWITHIN3MINUTES]messagewillbedisplayedonthebottomofthescreen.

SelectingMenuLanguage[LANGUAGE]Youcanchooseoneof27languagesforon-screeninstructions.

NOTE:Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

102


[MENU]

SelectingMenuColor[COLORSELECT]Youcanchoosebetweentwooptionsformenucolor:COLORandMONOCHROME.

TurningOn/OffSourceDisplay[SOURCEDISPLAY]ThisoptionturnsonoroffinputnamedisplaysuchasCOMPUTER1,COMPUTER2,COMPUTER3,HDMI,Display-Port,VIDEO,S-VIDEO,VIEWER,NETWORKtobedisplayedonthetoprightofthescreen.

Turningmessagesonandoff[MESSAGEDISPLAY]Thisoptionselectswhetherornottodisplayprojectormessagesatthebottomoftheprojectedimage.Evenwhen“OFF”isselected,thesecuritylockwarningisdisplayed.Thesecuritylockwarningturnsoffwhenthesecuritylockiscanceled.

TurningON/OFFControlID[IDDISPLAY]ID DISPLAY �� This option turns on or off the ID number which is displayed when the ID SET button on the remote control

is pressed� (→ page 106)

TurningOn/OffEcoMessage[ECOMESSAGE]Thisoptionturnsonoroffthefollowingmessageswhentheprojectoristurnedon.

TheEcoMessagepromptstheusertosaveenergy.When[OFF]isselectedfor[ECOMODE],youwillgetamessagetopromptyoutoselect[ON]for[ECOMODE].

When[ON]isselectedfor[ECOMODE]

Toclosethemessage,pressanyoneofthebuttons.Themessagewilldisappearifnobuttonoperationisdonefor30seconds.

103


When[OFF]isselectedfor[ECOMODE]

PressingtheENTERbuttonwilldisplaythe[ECOMODE]screen.(→page28)Toclosethemessage,presstheEXITbutton.

SelectingMenuDisplayTime[DISPLAYTIME]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselecthowlongtheprojectorwaitsafterthelasttouchofabuttontoturnoffthemenu.Thepresetchoicesare[MANUAL],[AUTO5SEC],[AUTO15SEC],and[AUTO45SEC].The[AUTO45SEC]isthefac-torypreset.

SelectingaColororLogoforBackground[BACKGROUND]Use this feature to display a blue/black screen or logo when no signal is available.The default background is[BLUE].

NOTE: • Evenwhenthebackgroundlogoisselected,iftwopicturesaredisplayedin[PIP/PICTUREBYPICTURE]mode,thebluebackgroundisdisplayedwithoutthelogowhenthereisnosignal.

SelectingIntervalTimeforFilterMessage[FILTERMESSAGE]Thisoptionallowsyoutoselectthetimepreferencebetweendisplayingthemessageforcleaningthefilters.Cleanthefilterwhenyougetthemessage“PLEASECLEANFILTER.”(→page155)Fiveoptionsareavailable:OFF,100[H],500[H],1000[H],2000[H]Thedefaultsettingis[OFF].


[INSTALLATION(1)]

SelectingProjectorOrientation[ORIENTATION]Thisreorientsyourimageforyourtypeofprojection.Theoptionsare:desktopfrontprojection,ceilingrearprojection,desktoprearprojection,andceilingfrontprojection.

Thisprojectorisafree-tiltprojectorwithwhichitispossibletoprojectimagesontheceiling(upward)orfloor(downward).Wheninstalledintheverticaldirection,setthe[FANMODE]installationorientation.(→page108)

104


DESKTOPFRONT CEILINGREAR

DESKTOPREAR CEILINGFRONT

SelectingAspectRatioandPositionforScreen[SCREEN]

Screentype Setstheaspectratiooftheprojectionscreen.

4:3screen Forascreenwitha4:3aspectratio

16:9screen Forascreenwitha16:9aspectratio

16:10screen For a screen with a 16:10 aspectratio

Displayposition(forthePA600X/PA500X)

When the screen type is set to 16:9 or 16:10, adjusts theverticalpositionofthedisplayrange.Downward

Upward

NOTE:• Afterchangingthescreentype,checkthesettingof[ASPECTRATIO]inthemenu. (→page96)• Whenthescreentypeissetto“4:3screen”,thisisdisplayedinlightcharactersandcannotbeselected.

UsingGeometricCorrection[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]Thisfeatureretrievesgeometricdataregisteredintheprojectormemory.Threepresetsofgeometricdatahavebeenregistered.Toturnoffthisfeature,select[OFF].

NOTE:• The[KEYSTONE]and[CORNERSTONE]adjustmentsarenotavailablewhengeometricdataisapplied.• Toclearyourgeometricdata,pressthe3DREFORMbuttonforaminimumof2seconds.• The[GEOMETRICCORRECTION]featurecancauseanimagetobeslightlyblurredbecausethecorrectionismadeelectroni-

cally.

UsingMulti-ScreenCompensation[MULTI-SCREENCOMP.]Thisfeatureallowsyoutomatchhueofimagesprojectedfrommultipleprojectorsthatareplacedinparallel.

MODE �� OFF: Turns off this function to return to the normal brightness�

105


ON: Turns on this function to make the screen darker� The [BRIGHTNESS] and the [CONTRAST] can be adjusted�

CONTRAST �� Adjusts the bright part of the picture�BRIGHTNESS �� Adjusts the dark part of the picture�

Adjusting

1. Prepare black and white images so that the images can be displayed on the computer screen.

2. Display the black image on the computer screen, and project the image from the projector.

3. Select [MULTI-SCREEN COMP.] → [MODE] → [ON].

4. Adjust the dark part of the images.

Press the button to select [BRIGHTNESS] and use the or to match the black part of another projector.

5. Display the white screen on the computer screen.

Project the image from two or more projectors.

6. Adjust the bright part of the images.

Press the button to select [CONTRAST] and use the or to match the white part of another projector.

Moving the slide bar toward [+] (plus) can change the white part of the image. Should this happen, move the slide bar toward [−] (minus) to adjust the brightness.

TIP:• Whenyouusemultipleprojectors,youcanusethe[CONTROLID]functiontooperateasingleprojectororalltheprojectorsfromtheremotecontrol.(→page106)

• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

[REF. WHITE BALANCE]Thisfeatureallowsyoutoadjustthewhitebalanceforallsignals.Thewhiteandblacklevelsofthesignalareadjustedforoptimumcolorreproduction.Uniformityisalsoadjustedwhentheredness(R)andblueness(B)ofthewhitecolorinthescreen’shorizontal(left/right)directionareuneven.

BRIGHTNESS R/BRIGHTNESS G/BRIGHTNESS B �� These adjust the picture’s black color�CONTRAST R/CONTRAST G/CONTRAST B �� These adjust the picture’s white color�UNIFORMITY R �� The further this is set to the + side, the stronger the redness on the left side of the picture (increasing

towards the left edge) and the weaker the redness on the right side of the picture (decreasing towards the right edge)�This is reversed when set to the – side�

UNIFORMITY B �� The further this is set to the + side, the stronger the blueness on the left side of the picture (increasing towards the left edge) and the weaker the blueness on the right side of the picture (decreasing towards the right edge)�This is reversed when set to the – side�

[STATICCONVERGENCE](PA500Uonly)Thisfeaturesallowsyoutoadjustforcolordeviationinthepicture.Thiscanbeadjustedinunitsof±1pixelinthehorizontaldirectionforHORIZONTALR,GandB,intheverticaldirec-tionforVERTICALR,GandB.

NOTE:ThisfeaturecanonlybesetforthePA500U.

106


[INSTALLATION(2)]

DisablingtheCabinetButtons[CONTROLPANELLOCK]ThisoptionturnsonorofftheCONTROLPANELLOCKfunction.

NOTE:• ThisCONTROLPANELLOCKdoesnotaffecttheremotecontrolfunctions.• Whenthecontrolpanelislocked,pressingandholdingtheEXITbuttonontheprojectorcabinetforabout10secondswillchangethesettingto[OFF].

TIP:Whenthe[CONTROLPANELLOCK]isturnedon,akeylockicon[ ]willbedisplayedatthebottomrightofthemenu.

EnablingSecurity[SECURITY]ThisfeatureturnsonorofftheSECURITYfunction.Unlessthecorrectkeywordisentered,theprojectorcannotprojectanimage.(→page37)


SelectingCommunicationSpeed[COMMUNICATIONSPEED]ThisfeaturesetsthebaudrateofthePCControlport(D-Sub9P).Itsupportsdataratesfrom4800to115200bps.Thedefaultis38400bps.Selecttheappropriatebaudrateforyourequipmenttobeconnected(dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns).

NOTE:• Select[38400bps]orlesswhenusingthesuppliedsoftwareprograms.• Yourselectedcommunicationspeedwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

TurningOnorOffRemoteSensor[REMOTESENSOR]Thisoptiondetermineswhichremotesensorontheprojectorisenabledinwirelessmode.Theoptionsare:FRONT/BACK,FRONT,andBACK.Iftheremotecontrolsystemdoesnotfunctionwhendirectsunlightorstrongilluminationstrikestheremotecontrolsensoroftheprojector,changeanotheroption.

SettingIDtotheProjector[CONTROLID]YoucanoperatemultipleprojectorsseparatelyandindependentlywiththesingleremotecontrolthathastheCONTROLIDfunction.IfyouassignthesameIDtoalltheprojectors,youcanconvenientlyoperatealltheprojectorstogetherusingthesingleremotecontrol.Todoso,youhavetoassignanIDnumbertoeachprojector.

CONTROL ID NUMBER ��Select a number from 1 to 254 you wish to assign to your projector�CONTROL ID ��Select [OFF] to turn off the CONTROL ID setting and select [ON] to turn on the CONTROL ID set-

ting�

107


NOTE: • When[ON]isselectedfor[CONTROLID],theprojectorcannotbeoperatedbyusingtheremotecontrolthatdoesnotsupporttheCONTROLIDfunction.(Inthiscasethebuttonsontheprojectorcabinetcanbeused.)

• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.•PressingandholdingtheENTERbuttonontheprojectorcabinetfor10secondswilldisplaythemenuforcancelingtheControlID.

AssigningorChangingtheControlID1. Turnontheprojector.

2. PresstheIDSETbuttonontheremotecontrol.

The CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.

If the projector can be operated with the current remote control ID, the [ACTIVE] will be displayed. If the projector cannot be operated with the current remote control ID, the [INACTIVE] will be displayed. To operate the inactive projector, assign the control ID used for the projector by using the following procedure (Step 3).

3. PressoneofnumerickeypadbuttonswhilepressingandholdingtheIDSETbutton on the remote control.

Example:

To assign “3”, press the “3” button on the remote control.

No ID means that all the projectors can be operated together with a single remote control. To set “No ID”, enter “000” or press the CLEAR button.

TIP:TherangeofIDsisfrom1to254.

4. ReleasetheIDSETbutton.

The updated CONTROL ID screen will be displayed.

NOTE: •TheIDscanbeclearedinafewdaysafterthebatteriesarerundownorremoved.•AccidentallypressinganyoneofthebuttonsoftheremotecontrolwillclearcurrentlyspecifiedIDwithbatteriesremoved.

108


[OPTIONS(1)]

SettingAutoAdjust[AUTOADJUST]ThisfeaturesetstheAutoAdjustmodesothatthecomputersignalcanbeautomaticallyormanuallyadjustedfornoiseandstability.Youcanautomaticallymakeadjustmentintwoways:[NORMAL]and[FINE].

OFF �� The computer signal will not be automatically adjusted� You can manually optimize the computer signal�NORMAL �� Default setting� The computer signal will be automatically adjusted� Normally select this option�FINE �� Select this option if fine adjustment is needed� It takes more time to switch to the source than when [NOR-

MAL]is selected�

SelectingFanMode[FANMODE]FanModeisusedtosetthespeedoftheinternalcoolingfan.

MODE �� Select three modes for fan speed: AUTO, HIGH, and HIGH ALTITUDE�AUTO: The built-in fans automatically run at a variable speed according to the internal temperature�HIGH: The built-in fans run at high speedHIGH ALTITUDE: The built-in fans run at a high speed� Select this option when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters or higher� To use the projector with ECO MODE ON in other installed conditions than desktop/ceiling with +/-20°, heed the following:(1) Select [HIGH ALTITUDE] for [MODE] at altitude 3200 feet/1000 meters�(2) Select [OFF] for [ECO MODE] at altitude 6800 feet/2100 meters or higher�

SETTING �� Select either [NORMAL] or [VERTICAL TILT UP] according to the installa-tion angle of the projector� Select [VERTICAL TILT UP] for angles of range from 60° to 120° indicated in gray� Select [NORMAL] for the other angle ranges�

RestrictionsforusingtheprojectorinECOMODEathighaltitudes:Theprojectorshouldnotbeinstalledinanywayotherthanthesettingdescribedinthetable,otherwiselamplifecoulddecreasedramatically.

ECO MODE OFF ONSETTING NORMAL/VERTICAL TILT UP NORMAL VERTICAL TILT UP

Orientation All orientationsDESKTOP/CEILING

+/− 20°DESKTOP/CEILING other

than +/− 20°Upward 90°(+/− 30°)

1000 m or lower 3200 ft or lower AUTO AUTO1000 to 1600 m 3200 to 5200 ft HIGH ALTITUDE1600 to 2100 m 5200 to 6800 ft HIGH ALTITUDE2100 to 2600 m 6800 to 8500 ft Not available

Whenyouwishtocooldownthetemperatureinsidetheprojectorquickly,select[HIGH].

90°120°

180°

270°

60°

0°

109


NOTE: • When[HIGHALTITUDE]isselectedfor[FANMODE],asymbolicon willbedisplayedatthebottomofthemenu.• ItisrecommendedthatyouselectHighspeedmodeifyouusetheprojectornon-stopforconsecutivedays.•Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhigher.• Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhigherwithoutsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancausetheprojectortooverheatandtheprotectorcouldshutdown.Ifthishappens,waitacoupleminutesandturnontheprojector.

•Usingtheprojectorataltitudeslessthanapproximately5500feet/1600metersandsettingto[HIGHALTITUDE]cancausethelamptoovercool,causingtheimagetoflicker.Switch[FANMODE]to[AUTO].

•Usingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600metersorhighercanshortenthelifeofopticalcomponentssuchas the lamp.

• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

SelectingtheSignalFormat[SIGNALSELECT(COMP3)]WhenanoutputdeviceisconnectedtotheCOMPUTER3videoinputconnectors,thissetstheinputsignal.

RGB/COMPONENT � RGB and component signals are identified automatically�VIDEO �� This switches to the video signal�

NOTE:Whenavideocable(commerciallyavailable)isconnectedtotheCOMPUTER3videoinputconnectors’G/Yconnector,videosignalscanbeprojected.Inthiscase,setto“VIDEO”.

[SEAMLESSSWITCHING](PA500Uonly)Whentheinputconnectorisswitched,theimagedisplayedbeforeswitchingisheldtoswitchtothenewimagewithoutabreakduetoabsenceofasignal.

NOTE:ThisfeaturecanonlybesetforthePA500U.

[COLOR SYSTEM]ThisfeatureallowsyoutoselecttheTVvideosignal,whichdiffersfromcountrytocountry(NTSC,PAL,etc.).Thisissetto[AUTO]byfactorydefault.Setthisiftheprojectorcannotidentifythesignalautomatically.

[DIGITAL AUDIO SELECT]Thisfeatureallowsyoutoselecttheaudioinputsfortheprojector’sHDMIandDisplayPortinputconnectors.

HDMI �� HDMI: Selects the HDMI input connector’s digital audio�COMPUTER2: Selects the COMPUTER2 audio input connector�

DisplayPort �� DisplayPort: Selects the DisplayPort input connector’s digital audio�COMPUTER2: Selects the COMPUTER2 audio input connector�

EnablingKeySoundandErrorSound[BEEP]This feature turnsonoroff thebuttonsoundoralarmwhenanerroroccursor the followingoperationsareper-formed.

-Displayingthemainmenu

-Switchingsources

-Resettingdatabyusing[RESET]

-PressingPOWERONorPOWEROFFbutton

110


[OPTIONS(2)]

SelectingPower-savingin[STANDBYMODE]Theprojectorhasthreestandbymodes:[NORMAL],[POWER-SAVING]and[NETWORKSTANDBY].ThePOWER-SAVINGmodeisthemodethatallowsyoutoputtheprojector inthepower-savingconditionwhichconsumeslesspowerthantheNORMALmode.TheprojectorispresetforNORMALmodeatthefactory.

NORMAL ��Power indicator: Orange light/STATUS indicator: Green lightPOWER-SAVING ��Power indicator: Red light/STATUS indicator: Off

The following connectors, buttons or functions will not work during this mode�- MONITOR OUT (COMP� 1) connector, and AUDIO OUT connector- LAN and Mail Alert functions- Buttons other than POWER button on the cabinet- Buttons other than POWER ON button on the remote control- Virtual Remote Tool fucntion

NETWORK STANDBY ��When in the standby mode, the POWER indicator will light orange and the STATUS indicator will not light� This shows that the projector’s power can be turned on by wired LAN�When in the standby mode, the following connectors, buttons or functions will not work:- MONITOR OUT (COMP� 1) connector, and AUDIO OUT mini jack- Wireless LAN Unit- [AUTO POWER ON (COMP1/3)]- Buttons other than POWER button on the cabinet- Buttons other than POWER ON button on the remote control- PC control commands for other than power-on

Important:•When[CONTROLPANELLOCK]or[CONTROLID]isturnedon,orwhen[COMPUTER1]or[COMPUTER3]isselectedfor[AUTOPOWERON(COMP1/3)],the[STANDBYMODE]settingbecomesinvalid.

Thismeansthattheprojectorisinthesameconditionwhenthe[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE].

NOTE: • Evenwhen[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],poweronoroffcanbedonebyusingthePCCONTROLport.• ThepowerconsumptioninthestandbymodewillnotbeincludedincalculatingCO2emissionreduction.• Yoursettingwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

EnablingDirectPowerOn[DIRECTPOWERON]Turnstheprojectoronautomaticallywhenthepowercordisinsertedintoanactivepoweroutlet.ThiseliminatestheneedtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolorprojectorcabinet.

111


TurningOntheProjectorByApplyingComputerSignal[AUTOPOWERON(COMP1/3)]WhentheprojectorisinStandbymode,applyingacomputersignalfromacomputerconnectedtotheCOMPUTER1INorCOMPUTER3INinputwillpowerontheprojectorandsimultaneouslyprojectthecomputer’simage.ThisfunctionalityeliminatestheneedtoalwaysusethePOWERbuttonontheremotecontrolortheprojectorcabinettopowerontheprojector.Tousethisfunction,firstconnectacomputertotheprojectorandtheprojectortoanactiveACinput.

NOTE: • Disconnectingacomputersignalfromthecomputerwillnotpowerofftheprojector.Werecommendusingthisfunctionincom-binationoftheAUTOPOWEROFFfunction.

• Thisfunctionwillnotbeavailableunderthefollowingconditions:- whenacomponentsignalisappliedtotheCOMPUTER1INorCOMPUTER3INconnector- whenaSynconGreenRGBsignalorcompositesyncsignalisapplied

• When[AUTOPOWERON(COMP1/3]isset,the[STANDBYMODE]settingbecomesinvalid.　Thismeansthattheprojectorisinthesameconditionwhenthe[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE].

• ToenabletheAUTOPOWERON(COMP1/3)afterturningofftheprojector,wait3secondsandinputacomputersignal. Ifacomputersignalisstillpresentwhentheprojectoristurnedoff,theAUTOPOWERON(COMP1/3)willnotworkandtheprojectorremainsinstandbymode.

EnablingPowerManagement[AUTOPOWEROFF]Whenthisoptionisselectedyoucanenabletheprojectortoautomaticallyturnoff(attheselectedtime:5min.,10min.,20min.,30min.)ifthereisnosignalreceivedbyanyinputorifnooperationisperformed.

NOTE:• The[AUTOPOWEROFF]functionwillnotworkwhen[VIEWER]or[NETWORK]isselectedfor[SOURCE].

SelectingDefaultSource[DEFAULTSOURCESELECT]Youcansettheprojectortodefaulttoanyoneofitsinputseachtimetheprojectoristurnedon.

LAST �� Sets the projector to default to the previous or last active input each time the projector is turned on�AUTO �� Searches for an active source in order of COMPUTER1 → COMPUTER2 → COMPUTER3 → HDMI →

DisplayPort → VIDEO → S-VIDEO → VIEWER → COMPUTER1 and displays the first found source�COMPUTER1 �� Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 1 IN connector every time the projector is turned on�COMPUTER2 �� Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 2 IN connector every time the projector is turned on�COMPUTER3 �� Displays the computer signal from the COMPUTER 3 IN connector every time the projector is turned on�HDMI �� Displays the digital source from the HDMI IN connector every time the projector is turned on� DisplayPort �� Displays the digital source from the DisplayPort every time the projector is turned on� VIDEO �� Displays the Video source from the VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on�S-VIDEO �� Displays the Video source from the S-VIDEO IN connector every time the projector is turned on�VIEWER �� Displays slides or plays back movie files from the USB memory device every time the projector is turned

on�NETWORK �� Displays the data sent from the computer via the LAN port (RJ-45) or the wireless LAN unit (sold separately)

mounted on the projector is projected�

112


Menu Descriptions & Functions [INFO.]Displaysthestatusofthecurrentsignalandlampusage.Thisitemhasninepages.Theinformationincludedisasfollows:

TIP:PressingtheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolwillshowthe[INFO.]menuitems.

[USAGE TIME]

[LAMPLIFEREMAINING](%)*[LAMPHOURSUSED](H)[FILTERHOURSUSED](H)[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS](kg-CO2)

* Theprogressindicatorshowsthepercentageofremainingbulblife.

Thevalueinformsyouoftheamountoflampusage.Whentheremaininglamptimereaches0,theLAMPLIFEREMAININGbarindicatorchangesfrom0%to100Hoursandstartscountingdown.

Iftheremaininglamptimereaches0hours,theprojectorwillnotturnon.

• ThemessagetotheeffectthatthelamporthefiltersshouldbereplacedwillbedisplayedforoneminutewhentheprojectoristurnedonandwhenthePOWERbuttonontheprojectorortheremotecontrolispressed.

Todismissthismessage,pressanybuttonontheprojectorortheremotecontrol.

Lamplife(H)

Replacement lampECO MODENORMAL

(OFF)ECO(ON)

3000 4000 NP21LP

• [TOTALCARBONSAVINGS]

Thisdisplaystheestimatedcarbonsavinginformationinkg.Thecarbonfootprintfactorinthecarbonsavingcal-culationisbasedontheOECD(2008Edition).(→page29)

113


[SOURCE(1)]

INPUTTERMINAL RESOLUTIONHORIZONTALFREQUENCY VERTICAL FREQUENCYSYNCTYPE SYNC POLARITYSCANTYPE SOURCE NAMEENTRYNO.

[SOURCE(2)]

SIGNALTYPE VIDEOTYPEBITDEPTH VIDEOLEVELLINKRATE LINKLANE

[WIRED LAN]

IPADDRESS SUBNETMASKGATEWAY MACADDRESS

114


[WIRELESS LAN(1)]

IPADDRESS SUBNETMASKGATEWAY MACADDRESS

[WIRELESS LAN(2)]

SSID NETWORKTYPEWEP/WPA CHANNELSIGNALLEVEL

[VERSION(1)]

FIRMWARE DATAFIRMWARE2 SUB-CPU

115


[VERSION(2)]

FIRMWARE3

[OTHERS]

PROJECTORNAME MODELNO.SERIALNUMBER LANUNITTYPECONTROLID(when[CONTROLID]isset)

116


Menu Descriptions & Functions [RESET]

Returning to Factory Default [RESET]TheRESETfeatureallowsyoutochangeadjustmentsandsettingstothefactorypresetfora(all)source(s)exceptthefollowing:

[CURRENTSIGNAL]Resetstheadjustmentsforthecurrentsignaltothefactorypresetlevels.Theitemsthatcanberesetare:[PRESET],[CONTRAST],[BRIGHTNESS],[COLOR],[HUE],[SHARPNESS],[ASPECTRATIO],[HORIZONTAL],[VERTICAL],[CLOCK],[PHASE],and[OVERSCAN].

[ALLDATA]Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypreset.AllitemscanberesetEXCEPT[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[FILTERMESSAGE],[SCREEN],[GEOMETRICCORRECTION], [MULTI-SCREENCOMP.], [REF.WHITEBALANCE], [STATICCONVERGENCE], [CONTROLPANELLOCK],[SECURITY],[COMMUNICATIONSPEED],[CONTROLID],[SEAMLESSSWITCHING],[STANDBYMODE], [FAN MODE], [LAMPLIFEREMAINING], [LAMPHOURSUSED], [FILTERHOURSUSED], [TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],[WIREDLAN],and[WIRELESSLAN].Toresetthelampusagetime,see“ClearingLampHourMeter[CLEARLAMPHOURS]”below.

[ALLDATA(INCLUDINGENTRYLIST)]Resetalltheadjustmentsandsettingsforallthesignalstothefactorypresetexcept[LANGUAGE],[BACKGROUND],[FILTERMESSAGE],[SCREEN],[MULTI-SCREENCOMP.],[REF.WHITEBALANCE],[STATICCONVERGENCE],[CONTROL PANEL LOCK], [SEAMLESS SWITCHING], [SECURITY SETTINGS], [COMMUNICATION SPEED],[CONTROLID],[FANMODE],[LAMPLIFEREMAINING],[LAMPHOURSUSED],[FILTERHOURSUSED],[TOTALCARBONSAVINGS],[WIREDLAN],and[WIRELESSLAN].Alsodeletesallthesignalsinthe[ENTRYLIST]andreturnstothefactorypreset.

NOTE:LockedsignalsinEntryListcannotbereset.

ClearingLampHourMeter[CLEARLAMPHOURS]Resetsthelampclockbacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenuforaconfirmation.Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

NOTE:Elapsedtimeofthelampusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

NOTE:Theprojectorwillturnoffandgointostandbymodewhenyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hoursafterthelamphasreachedtheendofitslife.Inthisconditionyoucannotclearthelamphourmeteronthemenu.Ifthishappens,presstheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolfor10secondstoresetthelampclockbacktozero.Dothisonlyafterreplacingthelamp.

117


ClearingtheFilterUsageHours[CLEARFILTERHOURS]Resetsthefilterusagebacktozero.Selectingthisoptiondisplayssubmenuforaconfirmation.Select[YES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The[OFF]itemisselectedfor[FILTERMESSAGE]atthetimeofshipment.When[OFF]isselected,youdonotneedtoclearthefilterusagehour.

NOTE:Elapsedtimeofthefilterusewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

118


❾ Application MenuWhen[NETWORK]isselectedfromthe[SOURCE]menu,theapplicationmenu[APPLICATIONMENU]willbedis-played.TheapplicationmenuallowsyoutosetuptheUserSupportware,NetworkSettings(NETWORKSETTINGS)andTools(TOOLS).TheUserSupportwareiscontainedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.In[ADMINISTRATORMODE],either[ADVANCED]menuor[BASIC]menucanbeselected.(→page136)The[BASIC]menucontainsminimumessentialsofmenusandcommands.

IMAGE EXPRESS UTILITYThisshowsinformationforprojectorname,resolution,andnetwork(wired/wireless)whicharerequiredtouseImageExpressUtility.Usethisinformationtosetupforyourcomputer.

DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITYThisallowsyoutosetupforpasswordentry/deletion,computersearchingandIPaddressonnetwork(wired/wireless)whicharerequiredtouseDesktopControlUtility.

119


NETWORK PROJECTORThisshowsinformationforprojectorname,resolution,andnetwork(wired/wireless)whicharerequiredtouseNetworkProjector.Usethisinformationtosetupforyourcomputer.

REMOTE DESKTOP CONNECTIONThisallowsyoutosetupforcomputernameentryandeffectsforRemoteDesktop.

NOTE:• AUSBkeyboardisrequiredtosetuptheRemoteDesktopConnection.

120


NETWORK SETTINGS

Important:• Consultwithyournetworkadministratoraboutthesesettings.• WhenusingawiredLANconnection,connectaLANcable(Ethernetcable)totheLANport(RJ-45)oftheprojector.(→page150)

TIP:Thenetworksettingsyoumakewillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.

HintsonHowtoSetUpLANConnection

TosetuptheprojectorforaLANconnection:Select[WIREDLAN]or[WIRELESSLAN]→[PROFILES]→[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2].TwosettingscanbesetforwiredorwirelessLAN.Nextturnonorofffor[DHCP],[IPADDRESS],[SUBNETMASK],and[GATEWAY]andselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page121)TorecallLANsettingsstoredintheprofilenumber:Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwiredorwirelessLAN,andthenselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page121)To connect a DHCP server:Turnon[DHCP]forwiredorwirelessLAN.Select[ON]andpresstheENTERbutton.TospecifyIPaddresswithoutusingtheDHCPserver,turnoff[DHCP].(→page122)

TosetonlyforwirelessLAN(NETWORKTYPEandWEP/WPA):Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]forwirelessLAN,andthenselect[ADVANCED]and[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.TheAdvancedmenuwillbedisplayed.(→page123)To select an SSID:Select[ADVANCED]→[SITESURVEY]andpresstheENTERbutton.SelectanSSIDandpressthe>buttontoselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.Ifyoudonotuse[SITESURVEY],typetheSSIDandselect[INFRASTRUCTURE]or[ADHOC].(→page123)Toreceivelampreplacementtimeorerrormessagesviae-mail:Select[ALERTMAIL],andset[SENDER'SADDRESS],[SMTPSERVERNAME],and[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS].Last,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.(→page134)Toexecute[EASYCONNECTION]usingImageExpressUtility2.0orImageExpressUtility2forMac:The[EASYCONNECTION]isamodethatcanabbreviatethetroublesomeLANsettingswhenusingtheImageExpressUtilityandconnectingthePCandprojectorviaawirelessLAN.TheImageExpressUtilityLite,ImageExpressUtility2.0,andImageExpressUtility2forMacarecontainedonthesuppliedNECProjectorCD-ROM.Touse[EASYCONNECTION],select[WIRELESSLAN]→[PROFILES]→[EASYCONNECTION].NOTE:The[EASYCONNECTION]functionisavailableonWindows7,WindowsVistaorWindowsXPSP3.

121


WIREDLANorWIRELESSLAN(ADVANCEDmenuonly)

*TousethewirelessLANfunctions,connectaseparatelysoldwirelessLANunittotheprojector.(→page151)

PROFILES • UptotwosettingsfortheLANportorUSBwirelessLANunitcanbestoredinmemoryoftheprojector.Totaloffoursettingscanbestored.

Fivesettingscanbestored:twoforthebuilt-inLANport,twoforwirelessLANandoneforWPS.

• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]andthendosettingsfor[DHCP]andtheotheroptions.

Afterdoingthis,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.Thiswillstoreyoursettingsinmemory.

• Torecallthesettingsfrommemory: Afterselecting[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]fromthe[PRO-

FILES]list. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.• Toexecute[EASYCONNECTION]usingImageExpressUtility

2.0orImageExpressUtility2forMac,select[WIRELESSLAN]→[PROFILES]→[EASYCONNECTION].

• TostopemittingradiowavesfromtheUSBWirelessLANUnit,select[DISABLE]fromthe[PROFILES]list.

• Selecting[SIMPLEACCESSPOINT]willallowtheprojectortocreateaninfrastructurenetwork.

AnSSIDwillbeautomaticallycreated. WhentheIPaddressoftheprojectorischanged,itwillauto-

maticallytakeeffectinoneortwominutes. Select“ObtainanIPAddressAutomatically”tosettheIPad-

dressofaconnectedcomputer. Ittakesafewsecondsforachangeofyourcomputer’sIPad-

dresstocomeintoeffectinWindows7/WindowsVistawhileittakesoneortwominutesinWindowXP.

When you connect with your computer to save your profileandselect“Automaticallyconnectwhenwithinrange”fromthePropertiestabofWirelessNetworkinWindowsforyourselectedprofile,yourwirelessLANwillbeaccessedunderthefollowingconditions:• atthetimeofturningonthecomputerortheprojector• whenthenotebooktypeiswithintherangeoftheprojector’s

wirelessLANcanbeachieved. DatatransmissionbetweenwirelessLANandwiredLANisnot

possible. Whenthe[SIMPLEACCESSPOINT]modeisusedtosend

images,itisrecommendedtoconnecttoonlyonecomputer.

—

122


• Whenselecting[WPS],thenetworkwillbeconnectedbyusingsettingsstoredautomaticallywiththeWPSfunction.

Selecting[WPS]willallowtheprojectortoaccessthenetworkbyusingthesettingstheWPSfunctionautomaticallystored.

DHCP PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassignanIPaddresstotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.ClearthischeckboxtoregistertheIPaddressorsubnetmasknumberobtainedfromyournetworkadministrator.

—

IPADDRESS SetyourIPaddressofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.

Upto12numericcharacters

SUBNETMASK Setyoursubnetmasknumberofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.


GATEWAY Setthedefaultgatewayofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.


WNSCONFIGURA-TION

SettheIPaddressofyourWINSserverofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[DHCP]isturnedoff.


AUTODNS PlaceacheckmarktoautomaticallyassigntheIPaddressofyourDNSserverconnectedtotheprojectorfromyourDHCPserver.ClearthischeckboxtosettheIPaddressofyourDNSserverconnectedtotheprojector.


DNSCONFIGURA-TION

SettheIPaddressofyourDNSserveronthenetworkconnectedtotheprojectorwhen[AUTODNS]iscleared.


ADVANCED* ThismenuallowsyoutosetvariousitemsforyourwirelessLANconnection(networktype,security).

—

RECONNECT Retrytoconnecttheprojectortoanetwork.Trythisifyouhavechanged[PROFILES].

—

*The[ADVANCED]settingscreenisavailablefor[WIRELESSLAN]only.

NOTE:• Ifyouselect[EASYCONNECTION]from[PROFILES],youcannotmakesettingstoDHCPanditsfollowingitemsexcept[CHAN-NEL]in[ADVANCED].

AdvancedSettings(settingsonlyrequiredwhenusingaseparatelysoldwirelessLANunit)(AD-(AD-VANCEDmenuonly)

123


SITESURVEY DisplaysalistofavailableSSIDsforwirelessLANonsite.SelectanSSIDwhichyoucanaccess.ToselectanSSID,highlight[SSID]andusethetoselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

�� Wireless access point

�� Ad Hoc PC

�� WEP or WPA enabled

—

SECURITY Thiswillturnonorofftheencryptionmodeforsecuretransmis-sion.Touseencryption,specifyaWEPkeyorencryptionkey.Selectyoursecuritytypeappropriateforyourcomputerandthewire-lessLANunit.

DISABLE �� Will not turn on the encryption feature� Your com-munications may be monitored by someone�

WEP(64bit) �� Uses 64-bit datalength for secure transmis-sion�

WEP(128bit) �� Uses 128-bit datalength for secure transmission� This option will increase privacy and security when compared to use of 64-bit datalength en-cryption�

WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK/WPA-EAP/WPA2-EAP �� These options provide stronger security than

WEP�

NOTE:• Thesecuritytype,WEPkey,andencryptionkeysettingsmustbethesameascommunicationdevicessuchasPCoraccesspointinyourwireless network.

• Whenyouuse[SECURITY],yourimagetransmissionspeedwillslowdown.

• [WPA-PSK],[WPA-EAP],[WPA2-PSK]and[WPA2-EAP]arenotavail-ablewhen[ADHOC]isselectedfrom[NETWORKTYPE].

—

SSID Enteranidentifier(SSID)forwirelessLAN.CommunicationcanbedoneonlywithequipmentwhoseSSIDmatchesSSIDforyourwirelessLAN.

Upto32alphanumericcharacters(casesensitive).

NETWORKTYPE SelectcommunicationmethodwhenusingwirelessLAN.

INFRASTRUCTURE ��Select this option when communicating with one or more equipment connected to the wire-less or wired LAN network via a wireless access point�

AD HOC ��Select this option when using the wireless LAN to directly communicate with a computer in peer-to-peer mode�

—

CHANNEL Select a channel. Available channels vary depending on thecountryandregion.Whenyouselect[INFRASTRUCTURE],makesurethattheprojectorandyouraccesspointareonthesamechannel;whenyouselect[ADHOC],makesurethattheprojectorandyourcomputerareonthesamechannel.

—

124


When[WEP(64bit)]or[WEP(128bit)]isselectedfor[SECURITYTYPE]

KEYSELECT SelectsoneWEPkeyfromthefourkeysbelow.

KEY1,KEY2,KEY3,KEY4

EnteraWEPkey.•Maximumnumberofcharacters

Option Alphanumeric(ASCII) Hexadecimal(HEX)

WEP64bit 5 10

WEP128bit 13 26

When[WPA-PSK],[WPA-EAP],[WPA2-PSK],or[WPA2-EAP]isselectedfor[SECURITYTYPE]

ENCRYPTIONTYPE Select[TKIP]or[AES].

KEY Enterencryptionkey.Keylengthmustbe8orgreaterand63orless.

125


[AUTHENTICATION](requiredforwirelessonly)SettingisrequiredforusingWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAP.

PreparationbeforesettingSelectawirelessLANcompliantWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAPauthenticationandinstalladigitalcertificateontheprojec-tor.

1. Set[DATEANDTIME]ontheprojector.(→ page 140)

2. Useacomputertosavedigitalcertificates(files)forWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAPsettingtoyourUSBmemorydevice.

After completing saving the file, remove the USB memory device from the computer.

Important:• ThefileformatsofdigitalcertificatethataresupportedbytheprojectorareDERandPKCS#12only.• Theprojectorcannothandleanydigitalcertificatewhosefilesizeexceeds8KB.• CRL(CertificateRelocationList)isnotsupported.• Clientcertificatechainisnotsupported. 3. PlugtheUSBmemorydeviceintotheUSBportoftheprojector.

SettingProcedures1. Select[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIRELESSSLAN].

2. SetitemssuchasPROFILES,DHCP,IPADDRESS,SUBNETMASKandothersasrequired.

• Select[PROFILE1]or[PROFILE2]for[PROFILES].If[EASYCONNECTION]isselected,WPA-PSK,WPA2-PSK, WPA-EAP, or WPA2-EAP is not available.

3. Select[ADVANCED]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The [ADVANCED] setting screen will be displayed.

126


4. Select[SITESURVEY]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The “SSID” list will be displayed.

5. SelectaconnectingSSID,andthenselect[OK].

Finally press the ENTER button.

• SelecttheSSIDforwhichWPA-PSKorWPA2-PSKisset.

• Select[INFRASTRUCTURE( )] for [NETWORK TYPE]. WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA-EAP, or WPA2-EAP is not available when [AD HOC ( )] is selected.

6. Selectthe[SECURITY]tab.

The [SECURITY] page will be displayed.

7. Selectthe[SECURITYTYPE]fieldandpresstheENTERbutton.

The pull-down list will be displayed.

8. Select[WPA-EAP]or[WPA2-EAP]andpresstheENTERbutton.

9. Selectthe[TKIP/AES]fieldandpresstheENTERbutton.


10.Select[TKIP]or[AES]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Select [TKIP] or [AES] according to the setting for your access point.

127


11.Selectthe[AUTHENTICATION]tab.

The [AUTHENTICATION] page will be displayed.

Select either [EAP-TLS] or [PEAP-MSCHAPv2] for [EAP TYPE]. The setting items vary depending on the EAP type.

See the table below.

EAPType SettingItem Note

EAP-TLS UserName 1characterormoreand32charactersorless

ClientCertificate PKCS#12formatfile

CACertificate(Certificateauthority’scertificate)

DERformatfile

PEAP-MSCHAPv2 UserName 1characterormoreand32charactersorless

Password 1characterormoreand32charactersorless

CACertificate(Certificateauthority’scertificate)

DERformatfile

①Selecting[EAP-TLS]for[EAPTYPE]: The following section explains the operation for selecting [EAP-TLS].

For selecting [PEAP-MSCHAPv2], go on to Step 12 on page 129.

12.Selectthe[USERNAME]fieldandpresstheENTERbutton.

The character entry screen (software keyboard) will be displayed. Set a user name.

• Ausernamemustbe1characterormoreand32charactersorless.

(→ page 131)

128


13.Select[CLIENTCERTIFICATE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

A list of files (thumbnail screen) will be displayed.

• Foroperatingthethumbnailscreen,see“4.UsingtheViewer”inthe“User’sManual”(PDF).

• Toreturntothe[AUTHENTICATION]page,presstheEXITbutton.

NOTE:InstallingadigitalcertificateYoucaninstalleachdigitalcertificate(clientcertificateandCAcertificate)for[PROFILE1(or2)]onafile-by-filebasis.• InstallarootCAcertificateforaCAcertificate.• Ifyouinstalladigitalcertificateoveryourexistingdigitalcertificate,theexistingdigitalcertificatewillbeoverwrittenwiththenewdigitalcertificate.

• Onceadigitalcertificatehasbeeninstalled,itsinformationcannotbedeletedevenifyoustopsettingWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAP.

14.Onthethumbnailscreen,selectadigitalcertificate(PKCS#12formatfile)savedinyourUSBmemorydeviceandpresstheENTERbutton.

The password screen will be displayed.

15.Select[PASSWORD]fieldandpresstheENTERbutton.

The character entry screen (software keyboard) will be displayed. Set the password of the private key. A password must be 1 character or more and 32 characters or less.

The selected digital certificate file will be installed on the projector.

• WhentherootCAcertificateisnotincludedinthefilethatwasselectedinStep14,proceedtoStep16.Whenthe root certification authority certificate is included, proceed to Step 18.

16.Select[CACERTIFICATE]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The drive list screen will be displayed.

129


17.Onthethumbnailscreen,selectadigitalcertificate(DERformatfile)savedinyourUSBmemorydeviceandpresstheENTERbutton.

• SelectyourrootCAcertificatehere.

The selected digital certificate will be installed on the projector.

18.Aftercompletingrequiredsettings,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The [WIRELESS] page will be returned.

19.Select[RECONNECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

20.Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thiswillcompletesetting[EAP-TLS]for[EAPTYPE]in[WPA-EAP]or[WPA2-EAP].

TIP:ClearingthedigitalcertificatethatisinstalledontheprojectorToclearthedigitalcertificateinstalledontheprojector,followthestepsbelow.Bydoingthefollowingprocedure,allthedigitalcertificatesforthecurrentlydisplayedprofilewillbecleared.1. Select [CLEAR CERTIFICATES] in the bottom left of the [AD-

VANCED]settingscreenandpresstheENTERbutton.

A message for confirmation will be displayed.


The digital certificates will be cleared.

TIP:• ThePKCS#12formatdigitalcertificateincludingaCAcertificatewillbeinstalledasarootCAcertificate.

②Selecting[PEAP-MSCHAPv2]for[EAPTYPE]:

12.Fromthe[AUTHENTICATION]page,select[EAPTYPE]fieldandpresstheENTERbutton.


13.Select[PEAP-MSCHAPv2]andpresstheENTERbutton.

14.Select[USERNAME]fieldandpresstheENTERbutton.

The character entry screen (software keyboard) will be displayed. Set a user name.

• Ausernamemustbe32charactersorless.

(→ page 131)

130


15.Aftercompletingsettingausername,selectthe[PASSWORD]fieldandpresstheENTERbutton.

The character entry screen (software keyboard) will be displayed. Set a password.

• Apasswordmustbe32charactersorless.

16.Aftercompletingsettingthepassword,select[CACERTIFICATE]fieldandpresstheENTERbutton.

The drive list screen will be displayed.

• Foroperatingthethumbnailscreen,see“4.UsingtheViewer”inthe“User’sManual”(PDF).

• Toreturntothe[AUTHENTICATION]page,presstheEXITbutton.

NOTE:InstallingadigitalcertificateYoucan installeachdigitalcertificate(clientcertificateandCAcertificate) for [PROFILE1(or2)]onafile-by-filebasis.• InstallarootCAcertificateforaCAcertificate.• Ifyouinstalladigitalcertificateoveryourexistingdigitalcertificate,theexistingdigitalcertificatewillbeoverwrittenwiththenewdigitalcertificate.

• Onceadigitalcertificatehasbeeninstalled,itsinformationcannotbedeletedevenifyoustopsettingWPA-EAPorWPA2-EAP.

17.Onthethumbnailscreen,selectadigitalcertificate(DERformatfile)savedinyourUSBmemorydeviceandpresstheENTERbutton.

• SelectyourrootCAcertificatehere.

The selected digital certificate will be installed on the projector.

131


18.Aftercompletingrequiredsettings,select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The [WIRELESS] page will be returned.

19.Select[RECONNECT]andpresstheENTERbutton.

20.Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

Thiswillcompletesetting[PEAP-MSCHAPv2]for[EAPTYPE]in[WPA-EAP]or[WPA2-EAP].

TIP:ClearingthedigitalcertificatethatisinstalledontheprojectorToclearthedigitalcertificateinstalledontheprojector,followthestepsbelow.Bydoingthefollowingprocedure,allthedigitalcertificatesforthecurrentlydisplayedprofilewillbecleared.1. Select [CLEAR CERTIFICATES] in the bottom left of the [AD-

VANCED]settingscreenandpresstheENTERbutton.

A message for confirmation will be displayed.


The digital certificates will be cleared.

TIP:EnteringWEPkeys(SwitchingbetweenAlphanumericcharactersandhexadecimal)Toenterfrom[KEY1]to[KEY4],dothefollowing:1. Selectoneof[KEY1],[KEY2],[KEY3]and[KEY4]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The character entry screen (software keyboard) will be displayed.

2. Use the ▼, ▲, ◀, or ▶buttontoselectacharacterandpresstheENTERbutton.

• ToenteraWEPkeyorpassphrase,usealphanumericcharacters(ASCII)orhexadecimal(HEX).ToenteraPSKkey, use alphanumeric characters (ASCII).

• Pressthe[HEX]buttontochangeto[ASCII]tosetthekeyinASCIIdigit.Youcantogglethisbuttonbetween[ASCII] and [HEX].

• Enter0x(numeralandalphabetrespectively)rightinfrontofyourkeycode.

• Hexadecimaluses0to9andAtoF.

3. AfterenteringyourWEPkeyorpassphrase,usethe▼, ▲, ◀, or ▶buttontoselect[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

The character entry screen (software keyboard) will be closed.

132


WPSWhenthewirelessLANaccesspointconnectedtotheprojectorsupportsWPS(Wi-FiProtectedSetupTM),youcanusePINmethodorpushbuttonmethodtosetupthewirelessLANfortheprojector.

PINTYPE Seta4-digitor8digit-PINcodeofWPSforyouraccesspointtocompletesettingfortheSSIDsecurity.

PUSHBUTTONTYPE Pressthededicatedbuttonoftheaccesspointandtheprojector’swirelessLANunittocompletesettingfortheSSIDsecurity.

NETWORKINFORMATIONThe following informationwillbedisplayedwhen theprojector isconnected toanetwork (wiredLANorwirelessLAN).

PROJECTORNAME

HOSTNAME

DOMAIN

NETWORKINFOR-MATION(WIREDLAN/WIRELESSLAN)

CONNECTIONSTATUS,IPADDRESS,SUBNETMASK,GATEWAY,WINS,DNS,MACADDRESS,SSID,NETWORKTYPE,WEP/WPA,CHANNEL,SIGNALLEVEL,AU-THENTICATION,AUTHENTICATIONPERIOD

DISPLAYTHEINFOR-MATIONINAPPLICA-TIONMENU

Turnonoroffthedisplayofthenetworkinformation.

Themeaningsofthesestatusstatementsaredescribedbelow.

Statement Authenticationstatus

Authenticated Authenticationisdonecorrectly.

Failure Authenticationfailed.

Authenticating… Authenticationisinprocess.

Expired Thedigitalcertificateisexpired.Or[DATE,TIMEPRESET]isnotsetcorrectly.

TimeError The[DATE,TIMEPRESET]hasbeencleared.Setthecorrectdateandtime.

133


PROJECTORNAME(ADVANCEDmenuonly)

PROJECTORNAME Setauniqueprojectorname. Upto16alphanu-mericcharactersandsymbols

DOMAIN(ADVANCEDmenuonly)Setahostnameanddomainnameoftheprojector.

HOSTNAME Setahostnameoftheprojector. Upto15alphanumericcharacters

DOMAINNAME Setadomainnameoftheprojector. Upto60alphanumericcharacters

134


ALERTMAIL(ADVANCEDmenuonly)

ALERTMAIL Thisoptionwillnotifyyourcomputeroflampreplacetimeorerrormessagesviae-mailwhenusingwirelessorwiredLAN.

Placing a checkmark will turn on the Alert Mail feature�Clearing a checkmark will turn off the Alert Mail feature�

Sampleofamessagetobesentfromtheprojector:

Thelampandfiltersareat theendof itsusable life.Pleasereplacethelampandfilters.ProjectorName:NECProjectorLampHoursUsed:100[H]

—

HOSTNAME Typeinahostname. Upto15alphanumericcharacters

DOMAINNAME Typeinadomainnameofthenetworkconnectedtotheprojec-tor.

Upto60alphanumericcharacters

SENDER'SAD-DRESS

Specifythesender’saddress. Upto60alphanu-mericcharactersandsymbols

SMTPSERVERNAME

TypeintheSMTPservernametobeconnectedtotheprojec-tor.


RECIPIENT'SAD-DRESS1,2,3

Typeinyourrecipient’saddress. Upto60alphanu-mericcharactersandsymbols

TESTMAIL Sendatestmailtocheckifyoursettingsarecorrect.NOTE:• Ifyouenteredanincorrectaddressinatest,youmaynotreceiveanAlertmail. Should this happen, check if theRecipient’sAddress iscorrectly set.

• Unless any one of the [SENDER'SADDRESS], [SMTPSERVER'SNAME]or[RECIPIENT'SADDRESS1-3]isselected,[TESTMAIL]isnotavailable.

• Besuretohighlight[OK]andpresstheENTERbuttonbeforeexecuting[TESTMAIL].

—

135


NETWORKSERVICE(ADVANCEDmenuonly)

HTTPSERVER SetapasswordforyourHTTPserver. Upto10alphanumericcharacters

PJLink This option allows you to set a password when you use thePJLinkfeature.NOTE: • Donotforgetyourpassword.However,ifyouforgetyourpassword,consultwithyourdealer.

• WhatisPJLink? PJLinkisastandardizationofprotocolusedforcontrollingprojectorsofdifferentmanufacturers.Thisstandardprotocol isestablishedbyJapanBusinessMachineandInformationSystemIndustriesAssocia-tion(JBMIA)in2005.

TheprojectorsupportsallthecommandsofPJLinkClass1.• SettingofPJLinkwillnotbeaffectedevenwhen[RESET]isdonefromthemenu.


AMX Turnonoroff fordetection fromAMXDeviceDiscoverywhenconnectingtothenetworksupportedbyAMX’sNetLinxcontrolsystem.

TIP:WhenusingadevicethatsupportsAMXDeviceDiscovery,allAMXNetLinxcontrolsystemwillrecognizethedeviceanddownloadtheappropriateDeviceDiscoveryModulefromanAMXserver.

Placing a checkmark will enable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery�Clearing a checkmark will disable detecting the projector from AMX Device Discovery�

—

136


TOOLS

ADMINISTRATOR MODEThisallowsyoutoselectMENUMODE,savesettings,andsetapasswordfortheadministratormode.

MENUMODE Selecteither[BASIC]or[ADVANCED]menu.(→page84)

—

NOTSAVESETTINGVALUES

Placing a check mark will not save your projector settings�Clear this check box to save your projector settings�

—

NEWPASSWORD/CONFIRMPASS-WORD

Assignapasswordfortheadministratormode. Upto10alphanumericcharacters

NOTE:When[LAST]isselectedfor[DEFAULTSOURCESELECT],placingacheckmarkfor[NOTSAVESETTINGVALUES]willforciblyselectNETWORKforsourceateverypower-ontime.Toavoidthis,select[AUTO]for[DEFAULTSOURCESELECT].

TIP:ToreturntotheADVANCEDmenufromtheBASICmenu,dothefollowing:1. UsetheSOURCEbuttononthecabinetorpresstheNETWORKbuttonontheremotecontroltoselect

[NETWORK]todisplaytheAPPLICATIONMENU.

2. Select[TOOLS]→[ADMINISTRATORMODE]→[MENUMODE]→[ADVANCEDMODE].

137


PROGRAM TIMER

Thisoptionturnson/offtheprojectorandchangesvideosignals,andselectsECOmodeautomaticallyataspecifiedtime.

NOTE:• Beforeusing[PROGRAMTIMER],makesurethatthe[DATEANDTIME]featureisset.(→page140)• MakesurethattheprojectorisinthestandbyconditionwiththePOWERcordconnected.• Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabouttwoweeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthemainpowerisnotsuppliedtotheprojectorfortwoweeksormore,thebuilt-inclockstopsworking.

• When[PROGRAMTIMER]isenabled,the[STANDBYMODE]settingbecomesinvalid. Thismeansthattheprojectorisinthesameconditionwhenthe[NORMAL]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE].

Settinganewprogramtimer1. OnthePROGRAMTIMERscreen,usethe▲ or ▼buttontoselect[SETTINGS]andpresstheENTERbut-

ton.

The [PROGRAM LIST] screen will be displayed.

2. SelectablankprogramnumberandpresstheENTERbutton.

The [EDIT] screen will be displayed.

3. Make settings for each item as required.

ACTIVE �� Place a check mark to enable the program�

138


DAY �� Select days of the week for the program timer� To execute the program from Monday to Friday, select [MON-FRI]�To execute the program in everyday basis, select [EVERYDAY]�

TIME �� Set the time to execute the program� Enter time in 24-hour format�FUNCTION �� Select a function to be executed� Selecting [POWER] will allow you to turn on or off the projector by setting

[ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [SOURCE] will allow you to select a video source by setting [ADVANCED SETTINGS]� Selecting [ECO MODE] will allow you to select [ECO MODE] by setting [ADVANCED SET-TINGS]�

ADVANCED SETTINGS �� Select power on/off, a type of video source, or ECO MODE for the selected item in [FUNCTION]�REPEAT �� Place a check mark to repeat the program continuing basis� To use the program this week only, clear the

check mark�

4. Select[OK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

This will complete the settings.

You will be returned to the [PROGRAM LIST] screen.

5. Select[BACK]andpresstheENTERbutton.

You will be returned to the [PROGRAM TIMER] screen.


You will be returned to the [TOOLS] screen.

NOTE:• Upto30differenttimersettingscanbeprogrammed.• When[PROGRAMTIMER]isturnedon,the[STANDBYMODE]settingisignored.• TheProgramTimerisexecutedonasettimebasis,notinaprogrambasis.• Oncetheprogramnotmarkedwithacheckin[REPEAT]hasbeenexecuted,thecheckmarkinthe[ACTIVE]checkboxwillbeclearedautomaticallyandtheprogramwillbedisabled.

• Whentheon-timeandtheoff-timesetforthesametime,theoff-timesettingwilltakepreference.• Twodifferentsourcesaresetforthesametime,thelargerprogramnumberwilltakepreference.• Theon-timesettingwillnotbeexecutedwhilethecoolingfansarerunningoranerrorisoccurring.• Iftheoff-timesettingisexpiredundertheconditioninwhichthepoweroffisnotpossible,theoff-timersettingwillnotbeexecuteduntilthepoweroffbecomespossible.

• Programsnotmarkedwithacheckmarkin[ACTIVE]ofthe[EDIT]screenwillnotbeexecutedeveniftheProgramTimerisenabled.

• Whentheprojectoristurnedonbyusingtheprogramtimerandifyouwanttoturnofftheprojector,settheoff-timeordoitmanuallysoasnottoleavetheprojectoronforalongperiodoftime.

139


Activatingtheprogramtimer

1. Select[ENABLE]onthe[PROGRAMTIMER]screenandpresstheENTERbutton.

The [ENABLE] will be activated.


The [PROGRAM TIMER] screen will be changed to the [TOOL] screen.

NOTE:• Clearing[ENABLE]willdisabletheProgramTimerevenwhenaprogramismarkedwithacheckmarkon[PROGRAMLIST]

screen. • When[ENABLE]isselected,the[PROGRAMLIST]cannotbeedited.Toedittheprograms,select[ENABLE]toturnofftheProgram

Timer.

Changingtheprogrammedsettings

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramyouwanttoeditandpresstheENTERbutton.

2. Changethesettingsonthe[EDIT]screen.


The programmed settings will be changed.

You will be returned to the [PROGRAM LIST] screen.

Changingtheorderofprograms

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramwhoseorderyouwanttochangeandpressthe▶ but-ton.

2. Press the ▼ button to select ▲ or ▼.

3. PresstheENTERbuttonafewtimestoselectarowtowhichyouwishtomovetheprogram.

The order of the programs will be changed.

Deletingtheprograms

1. Onthe[PROGRAMLIST]screen,selectaprogramnumberyouwanttodeleteandpressthe▶ button.

2. Press the ▼buttontoselect[DELETE].


The confirmation screen will be displayed.


The program will be deleted.

This will complete deleting the program.

140


DATE ANDTIME

Youcansetthecurrenttime,month,date,andyear.NOTE:Theprojectorhasabuilt-inclock.Theclockwillkeepworkingforabout2weeksafterthemainpoweristurnedoff.Ifthemainpowerisofffor2weeksormore,thebuilt-inclockwillcease.Ifthebuilt-inclockceases,setthedateandtimeagain.Thebuilt-inclockwillnotceasewhileinthestandbymode.

TIME ZONE SETTINGS �� Select your time zone�DATE AND TIME SETTINGS �� Set your current date (MM/DD/YYYY) and time (HH:MM)� INTERNET TIME SERVER �� If you place a check mark, the projector’s built-in clock will be synchronized with an Internet

time server in every 24 hours and at the time of projector’s startup�UPDATE �� Synchronizes the projector’s built-in clock immediately� The UPDATE button is not available

unless the INTERNET TIME SERVER check box is turned on�SUMMER TIME SETTINGS �� If you place a check mark, the clock for daylight saving will be enabled�

MOUSEThisoptionletsyoutochangeyourUSBmousesettings.ThemousesettingsfeatureisavailableforUSBmouseonly.Choosethesettingsyouwant:

MOUSE BUTTON �� [RIGHT HAND] or [LEFT HAND]MOUSE SENSITIVITY �� [FAST], [MEDIUM] or [SLOW]

141

6. Connecting to Other Equipment Mounting a lens (sold separately)

Fiveseparatebayonetstylelensescanbeusedwiththisprojector.ThedescriptionsherearefortheNP13ZL(2xzoom)lens.Mountotherlensesinthesamemanner.

NOTE:• Theprojectorandlensesaremadeofprecisionparts.Donotsubjectthemtoshockorexcessiveforces.• Removetheseparatelysoldlenswhenmovingtheprojector.Ifnot,thelenscouldbesubjecttoshockwhiletheprojectorisbeingmoved,damagingthelensandthelensshiftmechanism.

• Turnoffthepowerandwaitforthecoolingfantostopbeforemountingorremovingthelens.• Nevertouchthelenssurfacewhiletheprojectorisoperating.• Beverycarefulnottoletdirt,grease,etc.,onthelenssurfaceandnottoscratchthelenssurface.• Performtheseoperationsonaflatsurfaceoverapieceofcloth,etc.,topreventthelensfromgettingscratched.• Whenleavingthelensofftheprojectorforlongperiodsoftime,mountthedustcapontheprojectortopreventdustordirtfromgettinginside.

• Ifyouhavemultipleprojectors,becarefulofthefollowing:- WhenmountingalensdesignedexclusivelyforthisprojectorontoanotherprojectorintheNPseries,besuretoremovethelensattachmentbeforemountingthelensontheprojector.Thelenscannotbemountedifitsattachmentison.Forthetypesoflensesthatcanbemountedandinstructionsonremovingthem,seethelense’soperatinginstructions.

- Other typesoflensescannotbemountedonthisprojector.

Mounting the lens

1. Remove the dust cap from the projector.

2. Remove the lens cap on the back of the lens.

3.Insertthelensontotheprojectorwiththeyellow-markedprotrusion on the lens facing upwards.

There is a positioning slit on the projector’s lens insertion slot. Insert the lens slowly all the way in, keeping the positioning slit at the same angle.

Guiding notch

Yellow mark

142

4.Turnthelensclockwise.

Turn until a click is heard.

The lens is now fastened onto the projector.

TIP:MountingthelenstheftpreventionscrewFastenthelenstheftpreventionscrewincludedwiththeprojectortothebottomoftheprojectorsothatthelenscannotberemovedeasily.

Removing the lens

1. While pressing the lens release button on theprojector’s front panel fully in, turn the lenscounterclockwise.

The lens comes off.

NOTE: If the lens cannot be removedwhen the lens releasebuttonispressed,checkwhetherthelenstheftpreventionscrewismounted.

2. Slowlypullthelensofftheprojector.

- After removing the lens, mount the lens caps (front and back) included with the lens before storing the lens.

- If no lens is going to be mounted on the projector, mount the dust cap included with the projector.

143

6. Installation and Connections

Computer cable (VGA) (supplied)To mini D-Sub 15-pin connector on the projector. It is recommended that you use a commercially available distribution amplifier if connecting a signal cable longer than the cable supplied.

NOTE:ForMacintosh,useacommerciallyavail-ablepinadapter(notsupplied)toconnecttoyourMac’svideoport.

Stereo mini-plug audio cable (not supplied)

RGB - to - BNC cable (not supplied)


Making ConnectionsTheprojector can be connected to a computer using the computer cable (included), aBNC cable (5-core type)(commerciallyavailable),HDMIcable(commerciallyavailable)orDisplayPortcable(commerciallyavailable).

Analog RGB signal connection

• Connecttheincludedcomputercablebetweenthecomputer’sdisplayoutputconnector(miniD-Sub15-pin)andtheprojector’sComputer1orComputer2videoinputconnector.

• Whenconnectingthecomputer’sdisplayoutputconnector(miniD-Sub15-pin)andtheprojector’sComputer3videoinputconnector,useaBNCcable(5-core)→miniD-Sub15-pinconvertercable.

• Selectthesourcenameforitsappropriateinputconnectorafterturningontheprojector.

InputconnectorSOURCEbuttonontheprojector

cabinetButtonontheremotecontrol

COMPUTER1IN COMPUTER1 COMPUTER1



144


Digital RGB signal connection

• ConnectacommerciallyavailableHDMIcablebetweenthecomputer’sHDMIoutputconnectorandtheprojector’sHDMIinputconnector.

• ConnectacommerciallyavailableDisplayPortcablebetweenthecomputer’sDisplayPortoutputconnectorandtheprojector’sDisplayPortinputconnector.




HDMIIN HDMI HDMI

DisplayPort DisplayPort DisplayPort

NOTE:• Turnoffthepowerofthecomputerandprojectorbeforeconnecting.• Lowerthecomputer’svolumesettingbeforeconnectinganaudiocabletotheheadphonesconnector.Whenusingwithacomputerconnectedtotheprojector,adjustthevolumeofboththeprojectorandcomputertosettheappropriatevolumelevel.

• Ifthecomputerhasamini-jacktypeaudiooutputconnector,werecommendconnectingtheaudiocabletothatconnector.• ThisprojectordoesnotsupportNECvideounit(modelISS-6020)videodecodedoutputs.• When a video deck is connected via a scan converter, etc., the displaymay not be correct during fast-forwarding andrewinding.

TIP• TheComputer1andComputer2videoinputconnectorssupportWindowsPlugandPlay.TheComputer3videoinputconnectordoesnotsupportWindowsPlugandPlay.

• AMacintoshsignaladapter(commerciallyavailable)mayberequiredtoconnectaMacintoshcomputer. ToconnectaMacintoshcomputerequippedwithaMiniDisplayPorttotheprojector,useacommerciallyavailableMiniDisplayPort

→DisplayPortconvertercable.

HDMI cable (not supplied)

DisplayPort cable (not supplied)

145


CautionswhenconnectinganHDMIcable• UseacertifiedHighSpeedHDMI®Cable or HighSpeedHDMI®CablewithEthernet.

CautionswhenconnectingaDisplayPortcable• UseacertifiedDisplayPortcable.

• Dependingonthecomputer,sometimemayberequireduntiltheimageisdisplayed.

• SomeDisplayPortcables(commerciallyavailable)havelocks.

• Todisconnectthecable,pressthebuttononthetopofthecable’sconnector,thenpullthecableout.

• NopowerissuppliedfromtheDisplayPortinputconnectortotheconnecteddevice.

• WhensignalsfromadevicethatusesasignalconverteradapterareconnectedtotheDisplayPortinputconnector,insomecasestheimagemaynotbedisplayed.

• WhentheHDMIoutputofacomputerisconnectedtotheDisplayPortinputconnector,useaconverter(commerciallyavailable).

CautionswhenusingaDVIsignal• WhenthecomputerhasaDVIoutputconnector,useacommerciallyavailableconvertercabletoconnect the

computer to theprojector’sHDMI input connector (onlydigital videosignals canbe input).Also, connect thecomputer’saudiooutputtotheprojector’sComputer2audioinputconnector.Inthiscase,switchtheHDMIsettingaton-screenmenu’saudioselectionontheprojectorto[COMPUTER2].(→page109)

Toconnectthecomputer’sDVIoutputconnectortotheprojector’sDisplayPortinputconnector,useacommerciallyavailableconverter.

NOTE:WhenViewingaDVIDigitalSignal• UseaDVI-to-HDMIcablecompliantwithDDWG(DigitalDisplayWorkingGroup)DVI(DigitalVisualInterface)revision1.0stan-dard.Thecableshouldbewithin197"/5mlong.

• TurnofftheprojectorandthePCbeforeconnectingtheDVI-to-HDMIcable.• ToprojectaDVIdigitalsignal:Connectthecables,turntheprojectoron,thenselecttheHDMIinput.Finally,turnonyourPC. Failuretodosomaynotactivatethedigitaloutputofthegraphicscardresultinginnopicturebeingdisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.

• SomegraphicscardshavebothanalogRGB(15-pinD-Sub)andDVI(orDFP)outputs.Useofthe15-pinD-Subconnectormayresultinnopicturebeingdisplayedfromthedigitaloutputofthegraphicscard.

• DonotdisconnecttheDVI-to-HDMIcablewhiletheprojector isrunning.If thesignalcablehasbeendisconnectedandthenreconnected,animagemaynotbecorrectlydisplayed.Shouldthishappen,restartyourPC.

146


Connecting an External Monitor

Youcanconnectaseparate,externalmonitortoyourprojectortosimultaneouslyviewonamonitorthecomputeranalogimageyou’reprojecting.

NOTE:• Daisychainconnectionisnotpossible.• Whenaudioequipmentisconnected,theprojectorspeakerisdisabled.

Com-puter cable (VGA) (supplied)


Computer cable (VGA) (not supplied)

147


Connecting Your DVD Player or Other AV EquipmentConnectingVideo/S-VideoInput




VIDEOIN VIDEO VIDEO

S-VIDEOIN S-VIDEO S-VIDEO

NOTE:TheAUDIOINLandRjacks(RCA)aresharedbetweentheVideoandS-Videoinputs.

NOTE:RefertoyourVCRowner’smanualformoreinformationaboutyourequipment’svideooutputrequirements.

NOTE:• AnimagemaynotbedisplayedcorrectlywhenaVideoorS-Videosourceisplayedbackinfast-forwardorfast-rewindviaascanconverter.

• Videosignalscanbeprojectedwhenavideocable(commerciallyavailable)isconnectedtotheComputer3videoinputconnector’sG/Yconnector.

Inthiscase,settheon-screenmenu’sSETUP→OPTION(1)→ SIGNALSELECT(COMP3) to [VIDEO]andselectComputer3fortheinputselection.

Audio cable (not supplied)

S-Video cable (not supplied)

Video cable (not supplied)

Audio equipment


148


Connecting Component Input







NOTE:• Normallythecomputersignalandcomponentsignalareidentifiedandswitchedautomatically.Ifthesignalcannotbeidentified,however,selectthesignalat[ADJUST]→[VIDEO]→[SIGNALTYPE]ontheprojector’son-screenmenu.Select“COMPUTER”or“VIDEO”fortheComputer3videoinputconnectorat[SETUP]→[OPTION(1)]→[SIGNALSELECT(COMP3)](→page109).

• ToconnecttoavideodevicewithaDconnector,usethesoldseparatelyDconnectorconverteradapter(modelADP-DT1E).

15-pin - to - RCA (female) × 3 cable adapter (ADP-CV1E)

RCA (female) - to - BNC (male) connector (not supplied)

Stereo mini plug - to - RCA audio cable (not supplied)

Component video RCA × 3 cable (not supplied)

DVD player Audio Equipment

149


Connecting HDMI InputYoucanconnecttheHDMIoutputofyourDVDplayer,harddiskplayer,Blu-rayplayer,ornotebooktypePCtotheHDMIINconnectorofyourprojector.NOTE:TheHDMIINconnectorsupportsPlug&Play(DDC2B).


HDMI cable (not supplied)Use High Speed HDMI® Cable.



HDMIIN HDMI HDMI

TIP:ForusersofaudiovideoequipmentwithanHDMIconnector:Select“Enhanced”ratherthan“Normal”ifHDMIoutputisswitchablebetween“Enhanced”and“Normal”.Thiswillprovideimprovedimagecontrastandmoredetaileddarkareas.Formoreinformationonsettings,refertotheinstructionmanualoftheaudiovideoequipmenttobeconnected.

• WhenconnectingtheHDMIINconnectoroftheprojectortotheDVDplayer,theprojector’svideolevelcanbemadesettingsinaccordancewiththeDVDplayer’svideolevel.Inthemenuselect[HDMISETTINGS]→[VIDEOLEVEL]andmakenecessarysettings.

• IftheHDMIinputsoundcannotbeheard,inthemenuselect[AUDIOSELECT]→[HDMI].

• IftheHDMIinput’ssoundisnotoutput,checkthat[OPTIONS(1)] →[DIGITALAUDIOSELECT]→[HDMI]ontheprojector’son-screenmenuissetto“HDMI”.(→page109)

150


Connecting to a Wired LANTheprojectorcomesstandardwithaLANport(RJ-45)whichprovidesaLANconnectionusingaLANcable.TouseaLANconnection,youarerequiredtosettheLANontheprojectormenu.Select[APPLICATIONMENU]→ [NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIREDLAN].(→page121).

Example of LAN connectionExampleofwiredLANconnection

Server

Hub

LAN cable (not supplied)

NOTE:UseaCategory5orhigherLANcable.

151


Connecting to a Wireless LAN (sold separately)TheseparatelysoldwirelessLANunitallowsyoutouseawirelessLANenvironment.WhenusingtheprojectorinawirelessLANenvironment,theIPaddressandothersettingsmustbemadeontheprojector.

Important:• IfyouusetheprojectorwiththeUSBWirelessLANUnitintheareawheretheuseofwirelessLANequipmentis

prohibited,removetheUSBWirelessLANUnitfromtheprojector.

• BuytheappropriateUSBWirelessLANUnitforyourcountryorarea.

NOTE: • ThegreenLEDontheUSBWirelessLANUnitflashestoshowthattheUSBWirelessLANUnitisworking.• Yourcomputer’swirelessLANadapter(orunit)mustbecompliedwithWi-Fi(IEEE802.11b/g/n)standard.

FlowofSettingWirelessLANStep1: AttachtheUSBWirelessLANUnittotheprojectorifrequired.

Step2: Display[NETWORKSETTINGS]from[APPLICATIONMENU].(→ page 120)

Step3: Select[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[WIRELESSLAN]→[PROFILES]andset[EASYCONNECTION],[PROFILE1],or[PROFILE2].(→ page 121)

TIP:AccesstheHTTPserverfunctiontoset[NETWORKSETTINGS]→[SETTINGS]→[WIRELESS]→[EASYCONNECTION],[PRO-FILE1],[PROFILE2].

Mounting a wireless LAN unit

CAUTION:• ThewirelessLANunitismountedinsidetheprojector.Beforemountingit,turnoffthepower,unplugthepower

cordandlettheprojectorcooldowncompletely.Removingthefilterunitwhiletheprojectorisrunningcouldresultinburnsorelectricshocksfromtouchinginternalparts.

NOTE:• ThewirelessLANunithasafrontandabackandmustbemountedinthewirelessLANportinaspecificdirection.Theportisdesignedsothattheunitcannotbemountedintheoppositedirection,buttryingtopushitinbyforcecoulddamagethewirelessLANunitport.

• Topreventdamageduetostaticelectricity,touchanearbymetalobject(adoorknob,aluminumsash,etc.)beforetouchingthewirelessLANunittoeliminatethestaticelectricityfromyourbody.

• DisconnectthepowercordwhenmountingandremovingthewirelessLANunit. MountingandremovingthewirelessLANunitwhiletheprojector’spowerisoncoulddamagethewirelessLANunitorresultinmalfunctionontheprojector.Iftheprojectorshouldmalfunction,turnofftheprojector’spower,unplugthepowercord,thenplugthe power cord back in.

• DonotconnectanyUSBdeviceotherthanthewirelessLANunittotheUSB(LAN)port.Also,donotconnectthewirelessLANunittotheUSBportintheconnectorsection.

152


1. Press the buttontosettheprojectortothestandbymode,thendisconnect the power cord.

Wait for the projector to fully cool off.

2. Remove the filter cover.

Pressing the buttons on the left and right sides of the filter cover upwards, pull the filter cover towards you to remove it.

3. Remove the filter unit.

Pull the hooks on the left and right sides of the filter unit towards you to remove the filter unit.

4. SlowlyinsertthewirelessLANunitintotheUSB(LAN)port.

- Remove the wireless LAN unit’s cap, set the unit with the front (the side with the indicator) facing upwards, hold the back edge and insert the unit gently.

Next, press the wireless LAN unit in with a finger.

- The cap you have removed will be used when the wireless LAN unit is removed, so store it in a safe place.

NOTE:IfthewirelessLANunitishardtoinsert,donotpushitinbyforce.

5. Mount the filter unit.

Insert the filter unit onto the projector with the sides on which the left and right hooks are located on the outside.

6. Mount the filter cover.

Insert the 4 catches on the top of the filter cover into the grooves in the projector, then press the left and right buttons to close.

- A click is heard and the filter cover is fastened in place.

WIRELESS

WIRELESS

Filter cover

Filter unit

Button

Hook

Wireless LAN unit

153


To remove the wireless LAN unit1. Remove the filter unit following steps 1 to 3 above.

2. RemovethewirelessLANunit.

If the wireless LAN unit is hard to remove, place a cloth, etc., over needle-nose pliers to grasp the wireless LAN unit and pull it out.

NOTE:DonotgraspthewirelessLANunitwithexcessiveforce.Doingsowilldamageit.

3. Mount the filter unit and filter cover as described in steps 5 and 6 above.

WIRELESS

WIRELESS

154


ExampleofwirelessLANconnection(NetworkType→Infrastructure)(→page123) PC with wireless

LAN card insertedPC with built-in wireless LAN function

Wired LAN

Wireless access point

USB Wireless LAN Unit

Toenabledirectcommunication(i.e.,peer-to-peer)betweencomputersandprojectors,youneedtoselecttheAdHocmode.(→page123)

PC with wireless LAN card inserted

PC with built-in wireless LAN function

ExampleofwirelessLANconnection(NetworkType→AdHoc)

USB Wireless LAN Unit

155

7. MaintenanceThissectiondescribesthesimplemaintenanceproceduresyoushouldfollowtocleanthefilters,thelens,thecabinet,andtoreplacethelampandthefilters.

1 Cleaning the FiltersTheair-filterspongekeepsdustanddirtfromgettinginsidetheprojectorandshouldbefrequentlycleaned.Ifthefilterisdirtyorclogged,yourprojectormayoverheat.

NOTE:Themessageforfiltercleaningwillbedisplayedforoneminuteaftertheprojectoristurnedonoroff.Whenthemessageisdisplayed,cleanthefilters.Thetimetocleanthefiltersissetto[OFF]attimeofshipment.(→page103)Tocancelthemessage,pressanybuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.

The two-layerfilteron theprojector improvescoolinganddust-proofcapabilitiescomparedwith theconventionalmodels.Theoutsides(intakeside)ofthefirstandsecondlayerfiltersremovedust.Tocleanthefilter,detachthefilterunitandthefiltercover.

CAUTION• Beforecleaningthefilters,turnofftheprojector,disconnectthepowercordandthenallowthecabinettocool.

Failuretodosocanresultinelectricshockorburninjuries.

1. Push up the buttons on the left and right to release the filter unit and pull it out.

2. Removethefilterunitbypullingoutthetab.

3. Remove the four filters.

(1) Turn the filter unit over and pull out the two soft accordion filters.

Filter cover Button

Filter unit

Tab

156

7. Maintenance

(2) Push the left edges of the filters and remove the two hard honeycomb filters.

- The filters cannot be removed by pressing the left and right edges.

4. Use a vacuum cleaner to vacuum all the dust inside.

Get rid of dust in the accordion filter

NOTE: • Wheneveryouvacuumthefilter,usethesoftbrushattachmenttovacuum.Thisistoavoiddamagetothefilter.

• Donotwashthefilterwithwater.Doingsocanresultinfilterclog-ging.

5. Remove dust from the filter unit and the filter cover.

Clean both outside and inside.

6. Attachthefourfilterstothefilterunit.

(1) Insert the hard honeycomb filters into the tips of the flanges at the center, then bend the filters and push them in under the hooks.

- The filters cannot be inserted from the outside.

(2) Turn the filter unit over.

Mount the accordion filters under the flanges along the outer edges.

•Eachaccordionfilterhasslitsinit.Aligntheslitswiththeprotrusions on the filter unit.

7. Mount the filter unit back onto the projector cabinet.


Slit

Flange

Hook

Hook

157

7. Maintenance

8. Put the filter cover back to the projector cabinet.


• Pushthefiltercoveruntilitclicksintoplace.

9. Clearthefilterusagehours.

Plug the power cord into the wall outlet, and then turn on the projector.

From the menu, select [RESET] → [CLEAR FILTER HOURS]. (→ page 117)

The interval time to clean the filters is set to [OFF] at time of shipment. When using the projector as it is, you do not clear the filter usage

Catch

Button

158

7. Maintenance

Cleaning the Lens• Turnofftheprojectorbeforecleaning.• Theprojectorhasaplasticlens.Useacommerciallyavailableplasticlenscleaner.• Donotscratchormarthelenssurfaceasaplasticlensiseasilyscratched.• Neverusealcoholorglasslenscleanerasdoingsowillcausedamagetotheplasticlenssurface.

Cleaning the CabinetTurnofftheprojector,andunplugtheprojectorbeforecleaning.• Useadrysoftclothtowipedustoffthecabinet.

Ifheavilysoiled,useamilddetergent.

• Neverusestrongdetergentsorsolventssuchasalcoholorthinner.

• Whencleaningtheventilationslitsorthespeakerusingavacuumcleaner,donotforcethebrushofthevacuumcleanerintotheslitsofthecabinet.

Vacuum the dust off the ventilation slits.

• Cloggedventilationslitsmaycauseariseintheinternaltemperatureoftheprojector,resultinginmalfunction.

• Donotscratchorhitthecabinetwithyourfingersoranyhardobjects

• Contactyourdealerforcleaningtheinsideoftheprojector.

NOTE:Donotapplyvolatileagentsuchasinsecticideonthecabinet,thelens,orthescreen.Donotleavearubberorvinylproductinprolongedcontactwithit.Otherwisethesurfacefinishwillbedeterioratedorthecoatingmaybestrippedoff.

159

7. Maintenance

Replacing the Lamp and the FiltersWhenthelampreachestheendofitslife,theLAMPindicatorinthecabinetwillblinkredandthemessage“THELAMPHASREACHEDTHEENDOFITSUSABLELIFE.PLEASEREPLACETHELAMPANDFILTER.USETHESPECIFIEDLAMPFORSAFETYANDPERFORMANCE.”willappear(*).Eventhoughthelampmaystillbeworking,replacethelamptomaintaintheoptimalprojectorperformance.Afterreplacingthelamp,besuretoclearthelamphourmeter.(→page116)

CAUTION• DONOTTOUCHTHELAMPimmediatelyafterithasbeenused.Itwillbeextremelyhot.Turntheprojector

offandthendisconnectthepowercord.Allowatleastonehourforthelamptocoolbeforehandling.

• Usethespecifiedlampforsafetyandperformance.

• DONOTREMOVEANYSCREWSexceptonelampcoverscrewandtwolamphousingscrews.Youcouldreceiveanelectricshock.

• Donotbreaktheglassonthelamphousing.

Keepfingerprintsofftheglasssurfaceonthelamphousing.Leavingfingerprintsontheglasssurfacemightcauseanunwantedshadowandpoorpicturequality.

• Theprojectorwillturnoffandgointostandbymodewhenyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hoursafterthelamphasreachedtheendofitslife.Ifthishappens,besuretoreplacethelamp.Ifyoucontinuetousethelampafterthelampreachestheendofitslife,thelampbulbmayshatter,andpiecesofglassmaybescatteredinthelampcase.Donottouchthemasthepiecesofglassmaycauseinjury.Ifthishappens,contactyourNECdealerforlampreplacement.

*NOTE:Thismessagewillbedisplayedunderthefollowingconditions:• foroneminuteaftertheprojectorhasbeenpoweredon• whenthe (POWER)buttonontheprojectorcabinetorthePOWEROFFbuttonontheremotecontrolispressed

Toturnoffthemessage,pressanybuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.

Optionallampandtoolsneededforreplacement:

• Phillipsscrewdriver(plus-head)

• Replacementlamp: NP21LP

Flow of Replacing the Lamp and the Filters

Step 1. Replace the lamp

Step 2. Replacethefilters(→ page 162)

Step 3. Clearthelampusagehoursandthefilterusagehours(→ page 116, 117)

160

7. Maintenance

2. Remove the lamp housing.

(1)Loosenthetwoscrewssecuringthelamphousinguntilthephillipsscrewdrivergoesintoafreewheelingcondi-tion.

•Thetwoscrewsarenotremovable.

•There isan interlockonthiscasetoprevent theriskofelectricalshock.Donotattempt tocircumvent thisinterlock.

(2)Removethelamphousingbyholdingit.

Interlock Guide hole

To replace the lamp: 1. Remove the lamp cover.

(1)Loosenthelampcoverscrew

•Thelampcoverscrewisnotremovable.

(2)Pullthebottomofthelampcovertowardsyouandremoveit.

CAUTION:

Makesurethatthelamphousingiscoolenoughtobeforeremovingit.

161

7. Maintenance

This completes the lamp replacement.Go on to the filter replacement.

NOTE:Whenyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hoursafterthelamphasreachedtheendofitslife,theprojectorcannotturnonandthemenuisnotdisplayed.Ifthishappens,presstheHELPbuttonontheremotecontrolfor10secondstoresetthelampclockbacktozero.Whenthelamptimeclockisresettozero,theLAMPindicatorgoesout.

4. Reattach the lamp cover.

(1)Insertthetopedgeofthelampcoverintothegrooveintheprojectorandclosethelampcover.

(2)Tightenthescrewtosecurethelampcover.

•Besuretotightenthescrew.

3. Install a new lamp housing.

(1)Insertanewlamphousinguntilthelamphousingispluggedintothesocket.

(2)Positionsothattheguideholeinthebottomrightofthelamphouseisovertheprotrusionontheprojectorthenpressallthewayin.

(3)Secureitinplacewiththetwoscrews.

•Besuretotightenthescrews.

162

7. Maintenance

To replace the filters:Fourfiltersarepackagedwiththereplacementlamp.Honeycombfilter(coarsemesh):Largeandsmallsizes(attachedtotheoutsideofthefilterunit)Accordionfilter(finemesh):Largeandsmallsizes(attachedtotheinsideofthefilterunit)

NOTE: • Replaceallfourfiltersatthesametime.• Beforereplacingthefilters,wipeoffdustanddirtfromtheprojectorcabinet.• Theprojectorisprecisionequipment.Keepoutdustanddirtduringfilterreplacement.• Donotwashthefilterswithsoapandwater.Soapandwaterwilldamagethefiltermembrane.• Putfiltersintoplace.Incorrectattachmentofafiltermaycausedustanddirttogetintotheinsideoftheprojector.

Beforereplacingthefilters,replacethelamp.(→page159)

1. Push up the buttons on the left and right to release the filter unit and pull it out.

2. Removethefilterunitbypullingoutthetab.

3. Remove the four filters.

(1) Turn the filter unit over and pull out the two soft accordion filters (large and small).

Filter cover

Filter unit

163

7. Maintenance

(2) Push the left edges of the filters and remove the two hard honeycomb filters (large and small).

•The filters cannot be removed by pressing the left and right edges.

4. Remove dust from the filter unit and the filter cover.

Clean both outside and inside.

5. Attachfournewfilterstothefilterunit.

(1) Insert the hard honeycomb filters into the tips of the flanges at the center, then bend the filters and push them in under the hooks.

- The filters cannot be inserted from the outside.

(2) Turn the filter unit over.

Mount the accordion filters under the flanges along the outer edges.

•Eachaccordionfilterhasslitsinit.Aligntheslitswiththeprotrusionsonthefilterunit.

6. Mount the filter unit back onto the projector cabinet.


7. Mount the filter cover back onto the projector cabinet.


This completes the filter replacement.Goontotheclearinglampandfilterhourmeters.

Toclearthelampusagehoursandthefilterusagehours:1. Placetheprojectorwhereyouuseit.

2. Plug the power cord into the wall outlet, and then turn on the projector.

3. Clearthelampusagehoursandthefilterusagehours.

1. From the menu, select [RESET] → [CLEAR LAMP HOURS] and reset the lamp usage hours.

2. Select [CLEAR FILTER HOURS].and reset the filter usage hours. (→ page 117)

164

8. User Supportware Installing Software Program

Installation for Windows software

ThesoftwareprogramsexceptImageExpressUtility2forMacsupportWindows7,WindowsVista,andWindowsXP.

NOTE:• Toinstalloruninstalleachsoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows7,Win-dowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(WindowsXP).

• Exitallrunningprogramsbeforeinstallation.Ifanotherprogramisrunning,theinstallationmaynotbecompleted.• TorunVirtualRemoteToolorPCControlUtilityPro4onWindowsXPHomeEditionandWindowsXPProfessional,“Microsoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0orlater”isrequired.TheMicrosoft.NETFrameworkVersion2.0orlaterisavailablefromMicrosoft’swebpage.Downloadandinstallitonyourcomputer

• ImageExpressUtilityLitewillbeinstalledtothesystemdriveofyourcomputer. Ifthemessage“Thereisnotenoughfreespaceondestination”isdisplayed,freeupenoughspace(about100MB)toinstalltheprogram.

1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.

The menu window will be displayed.

TIP:Ifthemenuwindowwillnotbedisplayed,trythefollowingprocedure.ForWindows71. Click“start”onWindows.

2. Click“AllPrograms”→“Accessories”→“Run”.

3. Type your CD-ROM drive name (example:“Q:\”) and“LAUNCHER.EXE” in“Name”. (example: Q:\LAUNCHER.EXE)

4. Click“OK”.

the menu window will be displayed.

165

8. User Supportware

2 Clickasoftwareprogramyouwishtoinstallonthemenuwindow.

The installation will start.

• Followtheinstructionsontheinstallerscreenstocompletetheinstallation.

TIP:

UninstallingaSoftwareProgramPreparation:Exitthesoftwareprogrambeforeuninstalling.Touninstallthesoftwareprogram,theWindowsuseraccountmusthave“Administrator”privilege(Windows7andWindowsVista)or“ComputerAdministrator”privilege(WindowsXP).

•ForWindows7/WindowsVista1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.

The Control Panel window will be displayed.

2 Click“Uninstallaprogram”under“Programs”

The “Programs and Features” window will be displayed.

3 Select the software program and click it.

4 Click“Uninstall/Change”or“Uninstall”.

•Whenthe“UserAccountControl”windowsisdisplayed,click“Continue”.

Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation.

•ForWindowsXP1 Click“Start”andthen“ControlPanel”.

The Control Panel window will be displayed.

2 Double-click“Add/RemovePrograms”.

The Add / Remove Programs window will be displayed.

3 Clickthesoftwareprogramfromthelistandthenclick“Remove”.

Follow the instructions on the screens to complete the uninstallation.

166

8. User Supportware

Installation for Macintosh softwareImageExpressUtility2forMacsupportsMacOSX.

1 InserttheaccompanyingNECProjectorCD-ROMintoyourCD-ROMdrive.

The menu window will be displayed.

2 Double-clicktheCD-ROMicon.

3 Double-clickthe“MacOSX”folder.

4 Double-click“ImageExpressUtility2(Intel).dmg”.

The “Image Express Utility 2” folder will be displayed.

• IfyourMacisPowerPC-based,double-click“ImageExpressUtility2.dmg”.

5 Movethe“ImageExpressUtility2”folderto“Applications”folderusingadrag-and-dropoperation.

TIP:

•Uninstallingasoftwareprogram1. Putthe“ImageExpressUtility2”foldertotheTrashicon.

2. PuttheconfigurationfileofImageExpressUtility2totheTrashicon.

• TheconfigurationfileofImageExpressUtility2islocatedin“/user/yourusername/library/Preferences/jp.co.nec.nevt. ImageExpressUtility.plist”.

167

8. User Supportware

Operating the Projector Via the LAN (Virtual Remote Tool)Thiswillhelpyouperformoperationssuchasprojector’spoweronoroffandsignalselectionviaaLANconnection.Itisalsousedtosendanimagetotheprojectorandregisteritasthelogodataoftheprojector.Afterregisteringit,youcanlockthelogotopreventitfromchanging.

Control FunctionsPowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,Logotransfertotheprojector,andremotecontroloperationonyourPC.

VirtualRemotescreen

RemoteControlWindow Toolbar

ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofVirtualRemoteTool.ForinformationonhowtouseVirtualRemoteTool,seeHelpofVirtualRemoteTool.(→page169)

NOTE:• Logodata(graphics)thatcanbesenttotheprojectorwithVirtualRemoteToolhasthefollowingrestrictions:- Filesize:256KBorless- Imagesize(resolution):thenativeresolutionoftheprojector

• ThelogodatathatissentwithVirtualRemoteToolwillbedisplayedatthecenterofthescreen.Itssurroundingwillbepaintedoutinblack.

TIP:• VirtualRemoteToolcanbeusedalsowithaserialconnection.

Connect the projector to a LAN.ConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page150),“Con-nectingtoaWirelessLAN(soldseparately)”(→page151)and“9ApplicationMenus-NETWORKSETTINGS”(→ page120)

168

8. User Supportware

Start Virtual Remote Tool

Startusingtheshortcuticon• Double-clicktheshortcuticon ontheWindowsDesktop.

Start from the Start menu• Click[Start]→[AllPrograms]or[Programs]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[VirtualRemoteTool]

→[VirtualRemoteTool].

When Virtual Remote Tool starts for the first time, “Easy Setup” window will be displayed.

The “Easy Setup” feature is not available on this model. Click “Close Easy Setup”.

Closing the “Easy Setup” window will display the “Projector List” window.

Select your projector you wish to connect. This will display the Virtual Remote screen.

TIP:• TheVirtualRemoteToolscreen(orToolbar)canbedisplayedwithoutdisplaying“EasySetup”window. Todoso,clicktoplaceacheckmarkfor“ DonotuseEasySetupnexttime”onthescreen.

NOTE:• When[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathenetwork(wiredLAN/wirelessLAN)connection.When[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviawirelessLANconnection.

169

8. User Supportware

ExitingVirtualRemoteTool1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon ontheTaskbar.

The pop-up menu will be displayed.

2 Click“Exit”.

The Virtual Remote Tool will be closed.

ViewingthehelpfileofVirtualRemoteTool•Displayingthehelpfileusingthetaskbar1 ClicktheVirtualRemoteToolicon onthetaskbarwhenVirtualRemoteToolisrunning.


2. Click“Help”.

The Help screen will be displayed.

•DisplayingthehelpfileusingtheStartMenu.1. Click“Start”.“Allprograms”or“Programs”.“NECProjectorUserSupportware”.“VirtualRemoteTool”.and

then“VirtualRemoteToolHelp”inthisorder.


170

8. User Supportware

Projecting Your Computer’s Screen Image from the Projector over a LAN (Image Express Utility Lite) UsingImageExpressUtilityLiteallowsyoutosendthecomputer’sscreenimagetotheprojectoroverawiredorwirelessLAN.ThissectionwillshowyouanoutlineabouthowtoconnecttheprojectortoaLANandtouseImageExpressUtilityLite.FortheoperationofImageExpressUtilityLite,seethehelpofImageExpressUtilityLite.

What you can do with Image Express Utility Lite

•Imagetransmission• Thescreenofyourcomputercanbesenttotheprojectorviaawiredorwirelessnetworkwithoutacomputercable

(VGA).

• Byusing“EASYCONNECTION”function,thecomplicatednetworksettingscanbesimplifiedandthecomputerwillautomaticallyconnecttotheprojector.

• Thescreenofyourcomputercanbesenttouptofourprojectorsatthesametime.

•GeometricCorrectionTool(GCT)See“❹ProjectinganImagefromanAngle(GeometricCorrectionToolinImageExpressUtilityLite)”.


Start Image Express Utility Lite.1. OnWindows,click“Start”→“Allprograms”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“ImageExpressUtility

Lite”→“ImageExpressUtilityLite”.

Image Express Utility Lite will start.

The select window for network connection will be displayed

2. SelectNetworkandclick“OK”.

The select window for destination will show a list of connectable projectors.

• Whenconnectingthecomputerdirectlytotheprojectorbyone-to-one,“EasyConnection”isrecommended.

• Whenoneormorenetworksfor“EASYCONNECTION”arefound,the“EasyConnectionSelectionScreen”windowwillbedisplayed.

• Tocheckforthenetworkavailableforconnectedprojectors,fromthemenu,select[INFO.]→[WIRELESSLAN]→[SSID].

3. Select“EasyConnection”networkyouwishtoconnect,andclick“Select”.

The target selection window will be displayed.

4. Placeacheckmarkforprojectorstobeconnected,andthenclick“Connect”.

• Whenoneormoreprojectorsaredisplayed,fromthemenuontheprojector,select[INFO.]→ [WIRELESS LAN] → [IP ADDRESS].

171

8. User Supportware

When connecting with the projector is establised, you can operate the control window to control the projector.

NOTE:• When[POWER-SAVING]or[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorthatisturned

off will not be displayed in the select window for destination• WhenthePA500Uisfound,"1280x800"willbedisplayedintheresolutionfield.

ControlWindowOperations(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)(6)

(1) (Source) �� Selects an input source of the projector� (2) (Picture) �� Turns on or off the Mute (Picture mute), Freeze (Freeze a picture), Play, and Geometric Correction Tool (GCT)

functions� (3) (Sound) �� Turns on or off Mute (Sound mute), play the sound and turns up or down the volume�(4) (Etc) �� Uses “Update”, “HTTP Server”*, “Settings” and “Information”�

(5) (Exit) �� Exit Image Express Utility Lite� You can also turn off the projector at the same time�(6) (Help) �� Displays the help of Image Express Utility Lite�

TIP:

ViewingtheHelpofImageExpressUtilityLite• DisplayingtheHelpfileofImageExpressUtilityLitewhileitisrunning.

Click the [?] (help) icon on the control window.


• DisplayingtheHelpfileofGCTwhileitisrunning.

Click “Help (C)” → “Help” on the Cornerstone Edit screen.


• DisplayingthehelpfileusingtheStartMenu.

Click “Start” → “All programs” or “Programs” → “NEC Projector User Supportware” → “Image Express Utility Lite” → “Image Express Utility Lite Help”.


172

8. User Supportware

Projecting an Image from an Angle (Geometric Correction Tool in Image Express Utility Lite) TheGeometricCorrectionTool (GCT) functionallowsyou tocorrectdistortionof imagesprojectedeven fromanangle.

What you can do with GCT

• TheGCTfeatureincludesthefollowingthreefunctions

• 4-pointCorrection:Youcanfitaprojectedimagewithintheborderofthescreeneasilybyalignthefourcornersofanimagetotheonesofthescreen.

• Multi-point Correction:Youcancorrectadistortedimageonthecornerofawallorirregularshapedscreenbyusingmanyseparatedscreenstocorrecttheimageaswellas4-pointCorrection.

• Parameters Correction:Youcancorrectadistortedimagebyusingacombinationoftransformationalrulespreparedinadvance.

Thissectionwillshowanexampleforusewith4-pointCorrection.Forinformationabout“Multi-pointCorrection”and“ParametersCorrection”,seethehelpfileofImageExpressUtilityLite.(→page171)

• Yourcorrectiondatacanbestoredintheprojectororyourcomputerwhichcanberestoredwhennecessary.

• Geometriccorrectioncanbeusedwhenconnectedtothenetwork(bywiredorwirelessLAN)orbyvideocable.

Preparation:Adjusttheprojectorpositionorthezoomsothattheprojectedimagecancoverthewholescreenarea.

1. Clickthe“ ”(Picture)iconandthenthe“ ”button.

The “4-point Correction” window will be displayed.

2. Clickthe“StartCorrection”buttonandthen“Start4-pointCorrection”button.

A green frame and a mouse pointer ( ) will be displayed.

• Four[• ] marks will be appeared at four corners of the green frame

173

8. User Supportware

3. Usethemousetoclickthe[ • ]markofwhichcorneryouwishtomove.

The currently selected [ • ] mark will turn red.

(In the above example, Windows screens are omitted for clarification.)

4. Dragtheselected[ • ]marktothepointyouwishtocorrectanddropit.

• Whenyouclicksomewherewithintheprojectimagearea,thenearest[• ] mark will go to the position where the mouse cursor is.

5. Repeat Step 3 and 4 to correct the distortion of the projected image.

6. Aftercompleting,right-clickthemouse.

The green frame and the mouse pointer will disappear from the projected image area. This will complete the cor-rection.

7. Clickthe“X”(close)buttononthe“4-pointCorrection”window.

The “4-point Correction” window will disappear and the 4-point correction will take effect.

8. Clickthe“ ”buttononthecontrolwindowtoexittheGCT.

TIP:• Afterperformingthe4-pointcorrection,youcansavethe4-pointcorrectiondatatotheprojectorbyclicking“File”→“Writingtotheprojector…”onthe“4-pointCorrection”window.

• SeetheHelpofImageExpressUtilityLiteforoperating“4-pointCorrection”windowandotherfunctionsthanGCT.(→page171)

174

8. User Supportware

Projecting Images or Videos from the Projector over a LAN (Image Express Utility 2.0)

What you can do with Image Express Utility 2.0

• UsingImageExpressUtility2.0allowsyoutosendthescreensofyourcomputerstotheprojectorviawired/wire-lessLAN.

ThedifferencefromImageExpressUtilityLiteisthatprojectedimagescanbesentfromacomputertonotonlyoneprojectorbutalsototwoormoreprojectorsatthesametime.

When“MeetingMode”isused,projectedimagescanbesentandreceivedbetweentwoormorecomputers.

• High-speed,high-qualityimagetransmissionsbasedonNEC’soriginalcompressionalgorithm

NEC’soriginalcompressionalgorithmallowshigh-qualityimagestobesentoverthenetworkathighspeed,fromyourcomputertotheprojector.

• Simultaneousprojectionbymultipleprojectors

Imagescanbesentfromacomputertonotonlyoneprojectorbutalsototwoormoreprojectorsatthesametime.

• “EasyConnection”functionforconnectingwirelessLAN

Byusing“EasyConnection”function*1,thecomplicatedsettingofwirelessLANcanbesimplified.

*1 ThisfunctioncanbeusedwhenWindowsXPisusedastheOSandwhenyouhavea“ComputerAdminis-trator”privilege.IftheOSisWindows7/WindowsVista,inputoflogonpasswordas“Administrator”maybeprompted.

175

8. User Supportware

• Projectedimagescanbetransferredandsavedtocomputers.

When“MeetingMode”isused,projectedimagescanbesenttothecomputersofalltheparticipants(attendants)ofa“Meeting”.Thereceivedimagescanbesavedtoyourcomputerwithamemo(textdata)attached.

Attendant

Attendant

PresenterAttendant

• 1-clickswitchingofpresenter

Whenswitchingtoanotherpresenterduringtheconference,theparticipants(attendants)cansimplyclickabuttontoswitchovertothenewpresenter.

• Centralmanagementoftheprojectingcomputer

UsingtheTrainingModeallowsyoutouseasinglecomputer(Manager)tomanagewhichcomputer(Attendant)projects.Possibleoperationincludesswitchingprojectingcomputerstoprojectfrom,aswellastemporarilytermi-natingcommunicationwiththeprojector.

Attendant AAttendant D(presenter)

AttendantB Attendant C

Manager

Mr. D,pleasestartyourpresentation.

NOTE::TheTrainingModeisnotinstalledviathe“Typical”installationoptionwhenImageExpressUtility2.0isinstalled.TouseTrainingMode,select“Extension”installationoptionontheinstallselectionscreenthatisdisplayedwhileImageExpressUtility2.0installationisinprogress,andselect“TrainingMode(Attendant)”or“TrainingMode(Manager)”.

Connecting the projector to a LANConnecttheprojectortotheLANbyfollowingtheinstructionsin“ConnectingtoaWiredLAN”(→page150),“Con-nectingtoaWirelessLAN”(→page151)and“9ApplicationMenus-NETWORKSETTINGS”(→page120)

176

8. User Supportware

Basic Operation of Image Express Utility 2.0ThissectionexplainsthefollowingthreecasesasexamplesofoperatingImageExpressUtility2.0.

(1)Transferringimagestotheprojector

(2)Holdingaconference

(3)Participatinginaconference

SendingImagestoProjector•Connectingprojector1 TurnonthepowertotheprojectorforwhichLANhasbeenset.

2 ClickWindows[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[ImageExpressUtility2.0]→[ImageExpressUtility2.0],inthatorder.

The “Selection Of Network Connections” window will be displayed.

A list of the network equipment connected to your computer will be displayed.

IMPORTANT:AscreenliketheonebelowisdisplayedwhenthesoftwareisstartedonaPCinstalledwithWindowsXPServicePack2(SP2)(orlater).Click“Unblock”ifthisisdisplayed.

3 Selectthenetworkequipmentthatistobeusedandclick[OK].

Select the network device displaying “Easy Connection” if the product LAN setting is for “Easy Connection.” This will call up the “Projector List” window.

177

8. User Supportware

4 Check( )theprojectortoconnectandclick[Connect].

If the name of the projector to connect is not on the list or if it is hidden, click [Update].

Click4-1

Click4-2

The screen of your computer will be projected from the projector.

At this time, the input signal of the projector will automatically change to “NETWORK”.

NOTE:• WhenthePA500Uisfound,"1280x800"willbedisplayedintheresolutionfield.

•TransferringimagesWhenyourcomputerisconnectedtotheprojector,thescreenofthecomputerisprojectedfromtheprojectorasis.TomakeyourpresentationbyusingaPowerPointfile,openthePowerPointfileandstartyourpresentation.

178

8. User Supportware

•StoppingorresumingthetransmissionofimagesThetransmissionofthescreenofthecomputertotheprojectorcanbetemporarilystoppedandthenresumed.

1 Clicktheprojectoricon( )ontheWindowstaskbar.

A pop-up menu will be displayed.

2 Click[StopSending].

The projector icon on the taskbar will change ( → ).

NOTE:Evenifthescreenofthecomputerischangedinthisstatus,theimageprojectedfromtheprojectordoesnotchange.Tomanipulatethescreenthatshouldnotbedisclosed(projectedfromtheprojector),stoptransmission.



4 Click[StartSending].

The projector icon on the taskbar will change ( → ).

The transmission of the screen for the computer will be resumed, and the current screen of the computer will be projected from the projector.

•EndthetransmissionofimagesExitImageExpressUtility2.0.



2 Click[Exit].

179

8. User Supportware

HoldingConferences•Holdingconferences1 Followsteps1through4in“Connectingprojector”of“SendingImagestoProjector”(→ page 176).

The screen of your computer will be projected from the projector.

•Discloseafiletotheparticipantsoftheconference.

NOTE:Todiscloseafiletotheparticipants,selectioncanbemadeonlyinfolderunits.Therefore,afolderonlyhavingfilesthatcanbedisclosedtotheparticipantsmustbecreatedinadvance.



2 Beforeclicking[SendtoPCandProjector],checkthatthereisa“•”markapplied.

3 Clickthe[ImageExpressUtility2.0]buttononthetaskbar.

The presenter window will be opened.

4 Click[SelectFolder].

Click4

180

8. User Supportware

5 Selectafoldersavingthefiletobedisclosedtotheparticipants,andclick[OK].

The file in the selected folder will be displayed in the list of files to transfer.

6 Click[Download].

The file will be shown to the participants.

NOTE:Whenthecomputerisconnectedtotheprojector,thecomputerscreenthatisinofbeingprogressisalsoprojectedfromtheprojec-tor.Tomanipulateascreenthatshouldnotbeshown(notprojected),temporarilystopthetransmission(→page178).

•Endingconference1 Click[File]inthepresenterwindow,andclick[Exit].

You can also end the conference by clicking [×] at the upper right of the presenter window.

ParticipatinginConference•Participatinginconferences1 ClickWindows[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[ImageExpressUtility2.0]

→[ImageExpressUtility2.0],inthatorder.

The “Selection Of Network Connections” window will be displayed.

A list of the network equipment connected to your computer will be displayed.

IMPORTANT:AscreenliketheonebelowisdisplayedwhenthesoftwareisstartedonaPCinstalledwithWindowsXPServicePack2(SP2)(orlater).Click“Unblock”ifthisisdisplayed.

2 Selectthenetworkequipmentthatistobeusedandclick[OK].

Select the network device displaying “Easy Connection” if the product LAN setting is for “Easy Connection.” This will call up the “ Meeting List” window.

181

8. User Supportware

3 ClicktheMeetingNametoparticipate,andclick[Connect].

Click3

The computer will be connected to the selected conference and the attendant window will be displayed.

If the presenter selects “Send to PC And Projector”, the image projected from the projector is displayed in the at-tendant window.

182

8. User Supportware

•Savingreceivedimages1 Click[Memo]intheattendantwindow.

A memo pane will be displayed.

Memopane

Click2

Click1

2 Click[SaveImage]intheattendantwindow.

The image displayed in the attendant window will be saved.

• Thesavedimageisaddedtothememolistandathumbnailisdisplayed.

• Amemocanbeattachedtothesavedimage.

REFERENCE:• IncaseofWindowsXP,acreatedfileissavedto“MyDocuments\ImageExpress\”underthedefaultsettings.IncaseofWindows7/WindowsVista,“Document\ImageExpress\”isthedefaultfoldertosaveacreatedfile.

• Afolderiscreatedbelowthedefaultfolderbasedonthetimeanddateoftheconference,andtheimageissavedtoafileinthecreated folder.

Forexample,ifaconferenceisheldat11:20onMay14,2009,thedefaultfoldernameonWindowsXPwillbe“MyDocuments\ImageExpress\2009-05-14_11-20_MeetingRecords”.

Inthisfolder,anHTMLfilenamed“MeetingRecords”iscreated. Thesavedimageissavedin“Images”folder.

183

8. User Supportware

•Downloadingdisclosedfile1 Click[FileTransfer]intheattendantwindow.

The “File Transfer” window will be opened.

Click1

2 Selectafiletodownload,andclick[Download].

Downloading will begin.

The progress of the downloading is displayed at the lower left of the window.

3 Whendownloadingiscomplete,click[File]inthe“FileTransfer”window,andclick[Exit].

The “File Transfer” window will be closed.

REFERENCE:• If“OpenAfterDownloading”ischecked,thefileisopenedbyspecifiedWindowsapplicationsoftwareafterdownloadingiscom-

plete.• IncaseofWindowsXP,acreatedfileissavedto“MyDocuments\ImageExpress\”underthedefaultsettings.IncaseofWindows7/WindowsVista,“Document\ImageExpress\”isthedefaultfoldertosaveacreatedfile.

• Afolderiscreatedbelowthedefaultfolderbasedonthetimeanddateoftheconference,andtheimageissavedtoafileinthecreated folder.

Forexample,ifaconferenceisheldat11:20onMay14,2009,thedefaultfoldernameonWindowsXPwillbe“MyDocuments\ImageExpress\2009-05-14_11-20_MeetingRecords”.

184

8. User Supportware

•ChangingpresenterThreetypesofsettingsmaybemadetochangethepresenter:“NotApproved”,“Approved”,and“ChangingProhibited”(thesecanbeselectedonlybythepresenter).Inthefollowingexample,“NotApproved”isselected.• Click[BecomeAPresenter]intheattendantwindow.

You will change from a participant to a presenter.

Click1

•LeavingconferenceLeavetheconferenceandexitImageExpressUtility2.0.• Click[File]intheattendantwindow,andclick[Exit].

You can also leave the conference by clicking [×] at the upper right of the attendant window.

185

8. User Supportware

Using the Projector to Operate Your Computer over a LAN (Desktop Control Utility 1.0)

UsingDesktopControlUtility1.0allowsyoutoremotelyoperateyourcomputerplacedatadistancefromtheprojectoroveranetwork(wiredLANorwirelessLAN).

What you can do with Desktop Control Utility 1.0

• AcommerciallyavailableUSBmouseisconnectedtotheprojectortooperatethecomputer.

• Suppose,forexample,aPowerPointfiletobepresentedinaconferenceissavedtoacomputerinyouroffice.IfthiscomputerisconnectedtotheprojectorintheconferenceroomwithLANwhentheconferenceisheld,thedesktopscreenofthecomputerinyouroffice(Windows7/WindowsVista/WindowsXP)canbeprojectedandthePower-Pointfilecanbepresentedbyoperatingtheprojector.Inotherwordsthecomputerdoesnotneedtobebroughtintotheconferenceroom.

IMPORTANT:• YoucanusetheDesktopControlUtility1.0tooperateacomputerlocatedinaseparateroomfromtheprojectoroveranetwork.Therefore,caremustbeexercisedtopreventanythirdpartyfromviewingthescreenofyourcomputer(importantdocuments),copyingfiles,orturningoffthepower.

NECassumesnoliabilityforanylossordamagesarisingfrominformationleakorsystemfailurewhileyouareusingDesktopControlUtility1.0.

• ThiswilldisconnectLANconnectionwhenthecomputergoesinthestandbymodewhiletheDesktopControlUtility1.0isbeingused.

IntheWindows7/WindowsVista,select[ControlPanel]→[HardwareandSound]→[PowerOptions].Set[Changewhenthecomputersleeps]to[Never].

In theWindowsXP, click [Control Panel]→ [Performance andMaintenance]→ [PowerOptions]→ [SystemStandby]→ [Never].

• ThescreensaverfunctionisoffwhileDesktopControlUtility1.0isrunning.


186

8. User Supportware

Using the projector to operate your computer’s desktop screen

IMPORTANT:• IncaseofWindows7/WindowsVista,disabletheuseraccountcontrolbeforeusingDesktopControlUtility1.0. WindowsVistahas“UserAccountControl”functiontoprotectthecomputer.Theuseraccountconfirmationwindowmaybe

displayed. SinceDesktopControlUtility1.0cannottransfertheuseraccountconfirmationwindow,thiswindowmakestheoperationunavail-able.BeforeusingDesktopControlUtility1.0,itisnecessarytodisabletheuseraccountcontrolofWindows7/WindowsVista.Afterloggingonwiththeadministratoraccount,followtheprocedurebelowtochangethesetting:

[ChangeProcedure]<ForWindows7>1 Click[ControlPanel]fromtheStartManu.

2 Click[UserAccountsandFamilySafety].

3 Click[UserAccounts].

4 Click[ChangeUserAccountControlsettings].

5 Change[Choosewhentobenotifiedaboutchangestoyourcomputer]to[Nevernotify]andclick[OK].

• Ifrestartingisrequested,click[Restartnow].

<ForWindowsVista>1 Click[ControlPanel]fromtheStartMenu.

2 Click[UserAccountsandFamilySafety].

3 Click[UserAccount].

4 Click[Enable/DisableUserAccountControl].

5 Remove the checkmark for [Use User Account Control (UAC) to Help Computer Protection] and click[OK].

• Ifrebootingisrequested,click[RebootNow].

UponcompletionofDesktopControlUtility,itisrecommendedtoenabletheuseraccountcontrol.

187

8. User Supportware

•Operationoncomputer1 ClickWindows[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[DesktopControlUtility

1.0]→[DesktopControl],inthatorder.

The “Selection Of Network Connections” window is displayed.

This displays a list of the network devices connected to the computer you are using.

2 Selectthenetworkdevicetouseandclick[OK].

The “Startup password settings” window will be displayed.

• IncaseofWindows7/WindowsVista,theUserAccountControlWindowisdisplayed.Click[OK]orinputtheadministrator password.

Screen when Desktop Control Utility 1.0 is started first time already

Screen if starting password has been set

IMPORTANT:• Besuretowritedownthestartingpasswordincaseyouforgetit.• ThestartingpasswordmustbeinputeachtimeDesktopControlUtility1.0isstarted.• Shouldyouforgetthestartingpassword,reinstalltheDesktopControlUtility1.0.AscreenliketheonebelowisdisplayedwhenthesoftwareisstartedonaPCinstalledwithWindowsXPServicePack2(SP2)(orlater).Click“Unblock”ifthisisdisplayed.

188

8. User Supportware

3 InputthestartingpasswordofDesktopControlUtility1.0,andclick[OK].

The “Current password” window will be displayed.

NOTE:ThecharacterstringdisplayedinthepasswordfieldvarieseachtimeDesktopControlUtility1.0isstarted.

4 Writedownthecharacterstringdisplayedinthepasswordfield.

Write down “PMHN” in the screen example of step 3.

5 Click[OK].

Desktop Control Utility 1.0 will be started.

Move to the room where the projector is installed, with the paper on which you have written down the password in step 4.

189

8. User Supportware

•Operatingtheprojector(connectingcomputer)1 ConnectaUSBmousethatiscommerciallyavailabletotheprojector.

USB

2 Turnonthepowertotheprojector.

Set the LAN setting of the projector in advance.

3 PresstheSOURCEbuttonontheprojectorunit.

The Source list will be displayed.

In case of the remote control, press the NETWORK button.

The “network menu” screen will be displayed, proceed to step 5.

4 Press the /buttonstoselect[NETWORK],andthenpresstheENTERbutton.

The “network menu” screen will be displayed.

190

8. User Supportware

5 Click[DESKTOPCONTROLUTILITY].

The “DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY menu” screen will be displayed.

6 Click“ENTRY”.

A password input screen will be displayed.

7 Inputthepasswordyouhavewrittendowninstep4of“Operationoncomputer”.

• Clickthe[BS]buttonontherightsideofthe[PASSWORD]fieldtodeletethecharactertotheleftofthecharacterinsertion point.

8 Afterinputtingthepassword,clickthe buttonontherightsideofthe[PASSWORD]field.

You are returned to the “DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY” menu screen.

9 Click[COMPUTERSEARCH].

The “COMPUTER LIST” screen will be displayed.

If the connection destination has not been found as a result of a COMPUTER SEARCH, search for the connection destination by inputting the IP address of the computer at the connection destination, click “Input IP Address”.

191

8. User Supportware

10Clickthecomputerattheconnectiondestinationandthen[OK].

The desktop screen of the computer at the connection destination will be displayed.

•Operatingtheprojector(manipulatingdesktopscreen)ThedisplayeddesktopscreencanbemanipulatedbyusingtheUSBmouseconnectedtotheprojector.IftheEXITbuttonoftheprojectororremotecontrolispressedwhilethedesktopscreenisdisplayed,anauxiliaryoperationbarisdisplayedatthelowerleftofthescreen.Manipulatetheauxiliaryoperationbarbyusingthebuttonsoftheprojectororremotecontrol.

192

8. User Supportware

<1> <2> <3> <4>

<1> (cut-off icon) ��Disconnects communication with the computer�

<2> (Shift icon) ��When the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed, shift lock status is set� The shift lock is canceled if the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed again�

<3> (Ctrl icon) ��When the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed, control lock status is set� The control lock is canceled if the highlight is moved to this icon and the ENTER button is pressed again�

<4> (ESC icon) ��The same operation as when the [ESC] key of the computer is pressed is performed� This icon is used, for example, to stop a slideshow of PowerPoint�

•Operatingtheprojector(disconnectingcommunications)1 PresstheEXITbuttonwhilethedesktopscreenisdisplayed.

An auxiliary operation bar will be displayed at the lower left of the screen.

2 Move the highlight to (cut-officon)andpresstheENTERbutton.

Communication will be disconnected and you are returned to the “DESKTOP CONTROL UTILITY” menu screen.

To resume communication, click [COMPUTER SEARCH].

After that, follow step 10 on the preceding page.

REFERENCE:Communicationcanalsobedisconnectedbyclickingtheprojectoricononthetaskbarandthenclicking“Disconnect”whilethedesktop screen is displayed.

193

8. User Supportware

•Operatingtheprojector(exitingDesktopControlUtility1.0)

1 Clicktheprojectoricon[ ]onthetaskbarwhilethedesktopscreenisdisplayed.

2 Click[Exit].

Desktop Control Utility 1.0 will be terminated.

3 PresstheEXITbuttonontheprojectorunitorontheremotecontrol.

The “network menu” screen will be displayed.

4 PresstheMENUbuttonontheprojectorunitorontheremotecontrol.

The on-screen menu will be displayed.

5 Selectaninputsourceotherthan[NETWORK].

194

8. User Supportware

Controlling the Projector over a LAN (PC Control Utility Pro 4)Usingtheutilitysoftware“PCControlUtilityPro4”,theprojectorcanbecontrolledfromacomputeroveraLAN.

Control FunctionsPowerOn/Off,signalselection,picturefreeze,picturemute,audiomute,adjusting,errormessagenotification,eventschedule.

ScreenofPCControlUtilityPro4

ThissectionprovidesanoutlineofpreparationforuseofPCControlUtilityPro4.ForinformationonhowtousePCControlUtilityPro4,seeHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4.

TIP:• PCControlUtilityPro4canbeusedwithaserialconnection.


Start PC Control Utility Pro 4Click“Start”→“Allprograms”or“Programs”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“PCControlUtilityPro4”→ “PCControlUtilityPro4”.

NOTE: • FortheSchedulefunctionofthePCControlutilityPro4towork,youmusthaveyourcomputerrunningandnotinstandby/sleepmode.Select“PowerOptions”fromthe“ControlPanel”inWindowsanddisableitsstandby/sleepmodebeforerunningthescheduler.

[Example]ForWindows7:Select“ControlPanel”→“SystemandSecurity”→“PowerOptions”→“Changewhenthecomputersleeps”→“Putthecomputertosleep”→“Never”.NOTE: • When[POWER-SAVING]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE]fromthemenu,theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviathenetwork(wiredLAN/wirelessLAN)connection.

When[NETWORKSTANDBY]isselectedfor[STANDBYMODE],theprojectorcannotbeturnedonviawirelessLANconnection.

TIP:

ViewingtheHelpofPCControlUtilityPro4• DisplayingtheHelpfileofPCControlUtilityPro4whileitisrunning.

Click “Help (H)” → “Help (H) …” of window of PC Control Utility Pro 4 in this order.


• DisplayingthehelpfileusingtheStartMenu.

Click “Start” → “All programs” or “Programs” → “NEC Projector User Supportware” → “PC Control Utility Pro 4” → “PC Control Utility Pro 4 Help”.


195

8. User Supportware

Converting PowerPoint files to Slides (Viewer PPT Converter 3.0)

UsingViewerPPTConverter3.0allowsyoutoconvertPowerPointfilesintoJPEGfiles.ConvertedJPEGfilesandIndexfiles(.idx)canbesavedtoaUSBmemory.WhentheUSBmemoryinsertedintotheprojector,theseJPEGfilesandIndexfiles(.idx)canbedisplayedwiththeviewerfunctionoftheprojectorwithoutconnectingacomputer.

NOTE:WhenViewerPPTConverter3.0hasbeeninstalled,oncestartViewerPPTConverter3.0oncewiththeprivilegeusedforinstallation.ThenexitfromViewerPPTConverter3.0withoutdoinganything.•StartingClickWindow’s[Start]→[AllPrograms]→[NECProjectorUserSupportware]→[ViewerPPTConverter3.0]→[ViewerPPTConverter3.0],inthatorder.

NOTE:WheninstallingViewerPPTConverter3.0ontoacomputerthathasPowerPointinstalled,ViewerPPTConverter3.0isautomaticallyregisteredasaPower-Pointadd-in.ItisnecessarytocancelViewerPPTConverter3.0add-inbeforeuninstallingViewerPPTConverter3.0.RefertoViewerPPTConverter3.0Helptounregistertheadd-in.

Converting PowerPoint files and saving them to a USB memory1. InserttheUSBmemoryintotheUSBportofthecomputer.

2. OnWindows,click“Start”→“Allprograms”→“NECProjectorUserSupportware”→“ViewerPPTConverter3.0”→“ViewerPPTConverter3.0”.

Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 will start.

3.Click“Brows...”andselectaPowerPointfileyouwishtoconvert,andthenclick“Open”.

4.Click“Next”.

196

8. User Supportware

5. SelecttheUSBmemorydrivefor“CardDrive”andtypein“Indexname”.

Index name must be eight alphanumeric characters or less. 2-byte character and file with a long filename cannot be used.

6. Click“Export”.

A confirmation message will be displayed.

7. Click“OK”.

Exporting a file will start.

8. Click“OK”.

9. Click“Exit”.

Viewer PPT Converter 3.0 will exit.

10.RemovetheUSBmemoryfromthecomputer.

NOTE:• BeforeremovingtheUSBmemoryfromtheUSBportofthecomputer,clickthe“SafetoRemoveHardware”icononthetask-

bar.

197

8. User Supportware

Projecting Your Mac’s Screen Image from the Projector over a LAN (Image Express Utility 2 for Mac)

UsingImageExpressUtility2forMaccontainedallowsyoutosendtheMac’sscreenimagetotheprojectoroveranetwork(wiredorwirelessLAN).ImageExpressUtility2forMacrunsonMacOSX10.2.8orlater.ItrunsonbothMacOSX(PowerPC)andMacOSX(Intel).Hereafter,“ImageExpressUtility2forMac”isabbreviatedas“ImageExpressUtility2”.

What you can do with Image Express Utility 2

• ViathenetworkimagesonthescreenofyourMaccanbesenttotheprojectorandprojectedonthescreen.

• Onecomputercansendimagestomorethanoneprojector.

Operating environment

Supported OSMacOSX10.2.8orlaterrequiredMacOSX10.3.0orlaterrecommended

Processor(CPU)PowerPCG3600MHzprocessorrequiredPowerPCG4800MHzorhigherrecommendedorIntelCoreSolo1.5GHzorhigherrequired

Memory256MBorhigherrequired

NetworkenvironmentWiredorwirelessLANrequiredthatsupportsTCP/IPOnlytheAirPortandAirPortExtremewirelessLANcardsareguaranteedtoworkwithImageExpressUtility2.“EasyConnection”supportsonlyAirPortandAirPortExtreme.

Supported resolutionVGA(640×480)orhigherrequiredXGA(1024×768)recommended(1024×768-1280×800recommendedforPA550W/PA500U)

Supported screen colors32thousandsofcolors,16.7millioncolorsrequired*256orfewercolorsarenotsupported.


198

8. User Supportware

Using Image Express Utility 2

Connectingtoaprojector1 Confirmthattheprojectorhasbeenturnedon.

2 ClicktheAirPortstatus( )ontheMacintoshmenubar,andclick“TurnAirPortOn”.

The AirPort status is changed to “ ” or “ ”.

• AirPortstatustypesandmeanings

...AirPort : Off

...AirPort : On ( in infrastructure connection )

...AirPort : On ( in adhoc connection )

REFERENCE:

WhentheAirPortstatus( / / )isnotdisplayedonthemenubar:1 ClickAppleMenu( )and[SystemPreferences...].

The “System Preferences” window will be displayed.

2 Click[Network].

The Network configuration window will be displayed.

3 Select[AirPort]in[Show].

4 Click[AirPort]tab.

The AirPort configuration item will be displayed.

5 Checkthe“ShowAirPortstatusinmenubar”checkboxatthebottomconfigurationitem.

The AirPort status ( / / ) will be displayed on the menu bar.

6 Clickthe[ ]buttonattheupperleftontheNetworkconfigurationwindow.

The Network configuration window will be closed.

199

8. User Supportware

3 Double-clickthe“ImageExpressUtility2”iconinthe“ImageExpressUtility2”folder.

• Attheinitialstart,the“LicenseAgreement”windowisdisplayed.

Thoroughly read the agreement shown on the screen, and click “I accept the terms in the license agreement” and the [OK] button.

Next, the “Authenticate” window will be displayed.

4 EntertheadministratornameandpasswordofyourMacintoshcomputer,andclickthe[OK]button.

The [Projector Selection] window will be displayed.

5 Checkthe( )checkboxtotheleftoftheprojectornametoconnectandclick[Connect].

The Macintosh computer and the projector are connected via wireless LAN, and images on the Macintosh screen are projected from the projector.

200

8. User Supportware

Stopping/RestartingImageTransmission•Stoppingimagetransmission1 Click[Tools]onthemenubar,andclick[StopSending].

Image transmission is temporarily stopped.

•Restartingimagetransmission1 Click[Tools]onthemenubar,andclick[StartSending].

Image transmission is started again.

ExitingImageExpressUtility21 Click[ImageExpressUtility2]onthemenubar,andclick[QuitImageExpressUtility2].

Image Express Utility 2 is exited.

201

9. Appendix

Throw distance and screen sizeFiveseparatebayonetstylelensescanbeusedonthisprojector.Refertotheinformationonthispageandusealenssuitedfortheinstallationenvironment(screensizeandthrowdistance).Forinstructionsonmountingthelens,seepage141.

Lens types and throw distancePA600X/PA500X

Screensize LensmodelnameNP11FL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP15ZL

30" 0.7-0.940" 0.6 0.9-1.2 1.2-2.460" 1.0 1.4-1.9 1.8-3.7 3.6-5.8 5.7-8.780" 1.3 1.9-2.5 2.4-4.9 4.8-7.8 7.6-11.6100" 1.6 2.4-3.2 3.0-6.1 6.0-9.7 9.6-14.6120" 2.0 2.9-3.8 3.7-7.4 7.3-11.7 11.5-17.6150" 2.5 3.7-4.8 4.6-9.2 9.1-14.7 14.4-22.0200" 4.9-6.4 6.1-12.3 12.2-19.6 19.3-29.4240" 5.9-7.7 7.4-14.8 14.7-23.6 23.2-35.3300" 7.4-9.6 9.2-18.5 18.4-29.5 29.1-44.2400" 9.8-12.8 12.3-24.7 24.6-39.4 38.8-59.0500" 12.3-16.0 15.4-30.8 30.7-49.2 48.6-73.8

TIPCalculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensizeNP11FLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×0.8:0.6m(min.)to2.5m(max.)NP12ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.2toH×1.6:0.7m(min.)to16.0m(max.)NP13ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.5toH×3.0:1.2m(min.)to30.8m(max.)NP14ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×3.0toH×4.8:3.6m(min.)to49.2m(max.)NP15ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×4.7toH×7.3:5.7m(min.)to73.8m(max.)“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenwiththePA600X/PA500XusingtheNP13ZLlens:Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→page204),H(screenwidth)=304.8cm.Thethrowdistanceis304.8cm×1.5to304.8cm×3.0=457.2cmto914.4cm(becauseofthezoomlens).

202

9. Appendix

PA550WScreensize Lensmodelname

NP11FL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP15ZL30" 0.7-1.040" 0.7 1.0-1.3 1.3-2.560" 1.0 1.5 - 2.0 1.9-3.8 3.8-6.1 5.9-9.180" 1.4 2.0 - 2.6 2.6 - 5.1 5.1 - 8.2 8.0 - 12.2

100" 1.7 2.5-3.3 3.2-6.4 6.3-10.2 10.0-15.4120" 2.1 3.1-4.0 3.9-7.7 7.6-12.3 12.1 - 18.5150" 2.6 3.8-5.0 4.8-9.7 9.6-15.4 15.2-23.1200" 5.1-6.7 6.5-12.9 12.8 - 20.6 20.3-30.9240" 6.2 - 8.0 7.8-15.5 15.4-24.7 24.4-37.1300" 7.7-10.1 9.7-19.4 19.3-30.9 30.5-46.5400" 10.3-13.4 13.0-25.9 25.8-41.3 40.7-62.0500" 12.9-16.8 16.2-32.4 32.2-51.7 51.0-77.6

TIPCalculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensizeNP11FLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×0.8:0.7m(min.)to2.6m(max.)NP12ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.2toH×1.6:0.7m(min.)to16.8m(max.)NP13ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.5toH×3.0:1.3m(min.)to32.4m(max.)NP14ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×3.0toH×4.8:3.8m(min.)to51.7m(max.)NP15ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×4.7toH×7.2:5.9m(min.)to77.6m(max.)“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenwiththePA550WusingtheNP13ZLlens:Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→page204),H(screenwidth)=323.1cm.Thethrowdistanceis323.1cm×1.5to323.1cm×3.0=484.7cmto969.3cm(becauseofthezoomlens).

PA500UScreensize Lensmodelname

NP11FL NP12ZL NP13ZL NP14ZL NP15ZL30" 0.7-0.940" 0.5 1.0-1.3 1.2 - 2.560" 0.8 1.5-1.9 1.9-3.8 3.7-6.0 5.9-9.080" 1.1 2.0 - 2.6 2.5 - 5.1 5.0 - 8.0 7.9-12.1100" 1.3 2.5-3.3 3.2-6.3 6.3-10.1 9.9-15.1120" 1.6 3.0-3.9 3.4-7.6 7.5-12.1 11.9-18.2150" 2.0 3.8-4.9 4.8-9.5 9.4-15.2 14.9-22.8200" 5.1 - 6.6 6.6-12.7 12.6-20.3 20.0-30.5240" 6.1-7.9 7.6-15.3 15.2-24.4 24.0-36.6300" 7.6-9.9 9.6-19.1 19.0-31.5 30.1-45.8400" 10.2-13.2 12.8 - 25.5 25.4-40.7 40.1-61.1500" 12.7-16.5 16.0-31.9 31.8-50.9 50.2-76.4

TIPCalculationofthethrowdistancefromthescreensizeNP11FLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×0.8:0.5m(min.)to2.0m(max.)NP12ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.2toH×1.5:0.7m(min.)to16.5m(max.)NP13ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×1.5toH×3.0:1.2m(min.)to31.9m(max.)NP14ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×2.9toH×4.7:3.7m(min.)to50.9m(max.)NP15ZLlensthrowdistance(m)=H×4.6toH×7.1:5.9m(min.)to76.4m(max.)“H”(Horizontal)referstothescreenwidth.*Figuresdifferbyseveral%withthetableabovebecausethecalculationisapproximate.Ex.:Throwdistancewhenprojectingona150"screenwiththePA500UusingtheNP13ZLlens:Accordingtothe“ScreenSize(forreference)”table(→page204),H(screenwidth)=323.1cm.Thethrowdistanceis323.1cm×1.5to323.1cm×3.0=484.7cmto969.3cm(becauseofthezoomlens).

203

9. Appendix

Projectionrangeforthedifferentlenses

40-150"

30-500"

40-500" 60-500" 60-500"

PA600X/PA500X : 0.6 - 2.5mPA550W : 0.7 - 2.6mPA500U : 0.5 - 2.0m

PA600X/PA500X

0.7 - 16.0mPA550W

0.7 - 16.8mPA500U

0.7 - 16.5m

NP12ZL

NP11FL




NP14ZL

NP15ZL

NP13ZL

204

9. Appendix

Tables of screen sizes and dimensions

PA600X/PA500X

PA550W/PA500U

Screen height

Screen height

Screen width

Screen width

4:3 screen size (diagonal)

16:10 screen size (diagonal)

Size(inches)

Screenwidth Screenheight

(inches) (cm) (inches) (cm)

30 24 61.0 18 45.740 32 81.3 24 61.060 48 121.9 36 91.480 64 162.6 48 121.9

100 80 203.2 60 152.4120 96 243.8 72 182.9150 120 304.8 90 228.6200 160 406.4 120 304.8240 192 487.7 144 365.8300 240 609.6 180 457.2400 320 812.8 240 609.6500 400 1016.0 300 762.0

Size(inches)

Screenwidth Screenheight

(inches) (cm) (inches) (cm)

30 25.4 64.6 15.9 40.440 33.9 86.2 21.2 53.860 50.9 129.2 31.8 80.880 67.8 172.3 42.4 107.7

100 84.8 215.4 53.0 134.6120 101.8 258.5 63.6 161.5150 127.2 323.1 79.5 201.9200 169.6 430.8 106.0 269.2240 203.5 516.9 127.2 323.1300 254.4 646.2 159.0 403.9400 339.2 861.6 212.0 538.5500 424.0 1077.0 265.0 673.1

205

9. Appendix

Lens shifting rangeThisprojectorisequippedwithalensshiftfunctionforadjustingthepositionoftheprojectedimagebyturningthelensshiftdials.Thelenscanbeshiftedwithintherangeshownbelow.Description of symbols:V indicates vertical (height of the projected image), H indicates horizontal (width of theprojectedimage).

NOTE:ThelensshiftfunctioncannotbeusedwhenusingtheNP11FLlens.

PA600X/PA500X

Desk/frontprojection

1V

1H0.3H 0.3H

0.5V

0.1V 0.1H 0.1H

Ceiling/frontprojector

1V

1H0.3H0.1H 0.1H

0.3H

0.5V

0.1V

PA550W


1V

1H0.3H 0.3H

0.6V

0.1V 0.1H 0.1H


Width of projected image





206

9. Appendix


1V

1H0.3H0.1H 0.1H

0.3H

0.6V

0.1V

PA500U


1V

1H0.3H*1

0.1H0.3H*1

0.5V

0.1V 0.1H


1V

1H0.3H*1 0.3H*1

0.1H

0.5V

0.1V 0.1H

NOTE*1:Horizontallensshiftrangeis0.15Hat150"projectedimagewiththelensNP13ZL

Ex.:Whenprojectingona150"screenThissectionisillustratedintheexampleforPA600X/PA500X•ThefollowingdescriptioncanapplytothePA550WandPA500U(16:10).Tocalculate,usescreensizesandthemaximumvalueforthelensshiftforPA550WandPA500U.Accordingtothetablesofscreensizesanddimensions(→page204),H=323.1cm,V=201.9cm.Adjustmentrangeintheverticaldirection:Theprojectedimagecanbemovedupwards0.6×201.9cm=121cm,downwards0.1×201.9cm=20cm(whenthelensisatthecenterposition).Foraceiling/frontinstallation,theabovefiguresareinverted.Adjustmentrangeinthehorizontaldirection:Theprojectedimagecanbemovedtotheleft0.3×323.1cm=97cm,totheright0.3×323.1cm=97cm.*Figuresdifferbyseveral%becausethecalculationisapproximate.







207

9. Appendix

Compatible Input Signal ListAnalogRGB

Signal Resolution ( dots ) Aspect Ratio Refresh Rate ( Hz )VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60/72/75/85/iMacSVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 56/60/72/75/85/iMacXGA 1024 × 768 *1 4 : 3 60/70/75/85/iMacXGA+ 1152 × 864 4 : 3 60/70/75/85WXGA 1280 × 768 *2 15 : 9 60

1280 × 800 *2 16 : 10 601360 × 768 *4 16 : 9 601366 × 768 *4 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60/75/85SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60/75/85SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60/75WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *3 4 : 3 60/65/70/75WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *3 16 : 10 60 (Reduced Blanking)HD 1280 × 720 *2 16 : 9 60Full HD 1920 × 1080 *3 16 : 9 60MAC 13" 640 × 480 4 : 3 67MAC 16" 832 × 624 4 : 3 75MAC 19" 1024 × 768 4 : 3 75MAC 21" 1152 × 870 *5 4 : 3 75MAC 23" 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 65

HDMI

Signal Resolution ( dots ) Aspect Ratio Refresh Rate ( Hz )VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60XGA 1024 × 768 *1 4 : 3 60HD 1280 × 720 *2 16 : 9 60WXGA 1280 × 768 *2 15 : 9 60

1280 × 800 *2 16 : 10 601366 × 768 *4 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *3 4 : 3 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *3 16 : 10 60 (Reduced Blanking)HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV (720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV (480p) 720 × 480 4:3 / 16:9 60SDTV (576p) 720 × 576 4:3 / 16:9 50SDTV(480i) 1440 × 480 4:3 / 16:9 60SDTV(576p) 1440 × 576 4:3 / 16:9 50

208

9. Appendix

DisplayPort

Signal Resolution ( dots ) Aspect Ratio Refresh Rate ( Hz )VGA 640 × 480 4 : 3 60SVGA 800 × 600 4 : 3 60XGA 1024 × 768 *1 4 : 3 60HD 1280 × 720 *2 16 : 9 60WXGA 1280 × 768 *2 15 : 9 60

1280 × 800 *2 16 : 10 601366 × 768 *4 16 : 9 60

Quad-VGA 1280 × 960 4 : 3 60SXGA 1280 × 1024 5 : 4 60SXGA+ 1400 × 1050 4 : 3 60WXGA+ 1440 × 900 16 : 10 60WXGA++ 1600 × 900 16 : 9 60WSXGA+ 1680 × 1050 16 : 10 60UXGA 1600 × 1200 *3 4 : 3 60Full HD 1920 × 1080 *3 16 : 9 60WUXGA 1920 × 1200 *3 16 : 10 60 (Reduced Blanking)HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV (720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV (480p) 720 × 480 4:3 / 16:9 60SDTV (576p) 720 × 576 4:3 / 16:9 50

Component

Signal Resolution ( dots ) Aspect Ratio Refresh Rate ( Hz )HDTV(1080p) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV(1080i) 1920 × 1080 16 : 9 50/60HDTV (720p) 1280 × 720 16 : 9 50/60SDTV (480p) 720 × 480 4:3 / 16:9 60SDTV (576p) 720 × 576 4:3 / 16:9 50SDTV(480i) 720 × 480 4:3 / 16:9 60SDTV(576i) 720 × 576 4:3 / 16:9 50

CompositeVideo/S-Video

Signal Aspect Ratio Refresh Rate ( Hz )NTSC 4 : 3 60PAL 4 : 3 50PAL60 4 : 3 60SECAM 4 : 3 50

*1NativeresolutiononXGAmodel(PA600X/PA500X)*2NativeresolutiononWXGAmodel(PA550W)*3NativeresolutiononUXGAmodel(PA500U)*4Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu. Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythesesignals,select[16:9]for[ASPECTRATIO].*5Theprojectormayfailtodisplaythesesignalscorrectlywhen[AUTO]isselectedfor[ASPECTRATIO]intheon-screenmenu. Thefactorydefaultis[AUTO]for[ASPECTRATIO].Todisplaythesesignals,select[4:3]for[ASPECTRATIO].

• Signalsexceedingtheprojector’sresolutionarehandledwithAdvancedAccuBlend.

• WithAdvancedAccuBlend,thesizeofcharactersandruledlinesmaybeunevenandcolorsmaybeblurred.

• Uponshipment,theprojectorissetforsignalswithstandarddisplayresolutionsandfrequencies,butadjustmentsmayberequireddependingonthetypeofcomputer.

209

9. Appendix

SpecificationsModelname PA600X/PA500X/PA550W/PA500UMethod ThreeprimarycolorliquidcrystalshutterprojectionmethodSpecificationsofmainparts

Liquidcrystalpanel

Size PA600X/PA500X:0.79"(withMLA)×3(aspectratio:4:3)PA550W:0.75"(withMLA)×3(aspectratio:16:10)PA500U:0.76"(withMLA)×3(aspectratio:16:10)

Pixels(*1) PA600X/PA500X:786,432(1024dots×768lines)PA550W:1,024,000(1280dots×800lines)PA500U:2,304,000(1920dots×1200lines)

Projectionlenses Zoom Manual(zoomrangedependsonlens)Focus ManualLensshifting Manual

Lightsource 330WAClamp(264WwhenEcomodeison)Opticaldevice Opticalisolationbydichroicmirror,combiningbydichroicprism

Lightoutput(*2)(*3)

ECOOFF PA600X:6000lm,PA500X:5000lm,PA550W:5500lm,PA500U:5000lmECOON(80%) PA600X:4800lm,PA500X:4000lm,PA550W:4400lm,PA500U:4000lm

Contrastratio(*2)(allwhite/allblack) 2000:1Screensize(throwdistance) 30"to500"(throwdistancedependsonlens)Colorreproducibility 10-bitcolorprocessing(approx.1.07billioncolors)(*4)Audiooutput Built-in10WmonauralspeakerScanningfrequency Horizontal 15to108kHzorless(24kHzorgreaterforRGBinputs),conformingtoVESA

standardsVertical 48to120Hz(50to85HzforHDMIinputs),conformingtoVESAstandards

Mainadjustmentfunctions Manualzoom,manualfocus,manuallensshift,inputsignalswitching(Computer/HDMI/DisplayPort/Video/S-Video/Viewer/Network),autoimageadjustment,pictureenlarging,picturepositionadjustment,muting(bothvideoandaudio),poweron/off,on-screendisplay/selection,etc.

Max.displayresolution(horizontal×vertical)

PA600X/PA500X/PA550W:1920×1200(handledwithAdvancedAccuBlend)PA500U:1920×1200

InputsignalsR,G,B,H,V RGB:0.7Vp-p/75Ω

Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withNegativePolaritySync)Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75ΩH/VSync:4.0Vp-p/TTLCompositeSync:4.0Vp-p/TTLSynconG:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)

Compositevideo 1.0Vp-p/75ΩS-Video Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω

C:286Vp-p/75ΩComponent Y:1.0Vp-p/75Ω(withSync)

Cb,Cr(Pb,Pr):0.7Vp-p/75ΩDTV:480i,480p,720p,1080i,1080p(60Hz) 576i,576p,720p,1080i(50Hz)DVD:Progressivesignal(50/60Hz)

Audio 0.5Vrms/22kΩorgreater

210

9. Appendix

Modelname PA600X/PA500X/PA550W/PA500UInput/outputconnectors

Computer/Component

Videoinput MiniD-Sub15-pin×2,BNCconnector×5Videooutput MiniD-Sub15-pin×1Audioinput Stereominijack×3Audiooutput Stereominijack×1(commonforallsignals)

HDMI Videoinput HDMI®ConnectortypeA×1DeepColor(colordepth):8-/10-/12-bitcompatibleColorimetry:RGB,YcbCr444andYcbCr422compatibleLipSynccompatible,HDCPcompatible(*5)

Audioinput HDMI: Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz Samplingbits–16/20/24bits

DisplayPort Videoinput DisplayPort×1Datarate:2.7Gbps/1.62GbpsNo.lanes:1lane/2lanes/4lanesColordepth:6-bit,8-bit,10-bitColorimetry:RGB,YcbCr444andYcbCr422compatibleHDCPcompatible(*5)

Audioinput DisplayPort: Samplingfrequency–32/44.1/48kHz Samplingbits–16/20/24bits

Video Videoinput RCA×1Audioinput RCA(RCAL/R)×1

S-Video Videoinput MiniDIN4-pin×1Audioinput (Commonwithvideoaudioinputconnector)

PCcontrolconnector D-Sub9-pin×1USBport USBtypeA×1USBportforwirelessLAN USBtypeA×1LANport RJ-45×1,10BASE-T/100BASE-TXRemoteconnector Stereominijack×1

Usageenvironment Operatingtemperature:5to40ºC(*6)Operatinghumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)Storagetemperature:-10to50ºC(*6)Storagehumidity:20to80%(withnocondensation)

Powersupply 100-240VAC,50/60HzPowerconsumption

Ecomodeoff PA600X/PA500X/PA550W:464W(100-130V)/443W(200-240V)PA500U:477W(100-130V)/455W(200-240V)

Ecomodeon PA600X/PA500X/PA550W:372W(100-130V)/356W(200-240V)PA500U:384W(100-130V)/369W(200-240V)

Standby 16W(100-130V)/18W(200-240V)(6WinNetworkstandbymode)

Power-savingmode 0.2WRatedinputcurrent 5.1A - 2.1AExternaldimensions 19.7"(width)×5.7"(height)×14.1"(depth)/499(width)×144(height)×359(depth)

mm(notincludingprotrudingparts)Weight PA600X/PA500X/PA550W:17.0lbs/7.7kg

PA500U:17.2lbs/7.8kg(notincludinglens)

*1:Effectivepixelsaremorethan99.99%.*2 Thisisthelightoutputvalue(lumens)whenthe[PRESET]modeissetto[HIGH-BRIGHT].Ifanyothermodeis

selectedasthe[PRESET]mode,thelightoutputvaluemaydropslightly.*3 CompliancewithISO21118-2005*4:Fullcolor(approx.16.77millioncolorsorgreater)whentheHDMI,DisplayPort,viewerornetworkinputconnector

isselected.*5:HDMI®(DeepColor,LipSync)withHDCP WhatisHDCP/HDCPtechnology? HDCPisanacronymforHigh-bandwidthDigitalContentProtection.HighbandwidthDigitalContentProtection

(HDCP)isasystemforpreventingillegalcopyingofvideodatasentoveraDigitalVisualInterface(DVI). IfyouareunabletoviewmaterialviatheHDMIinput,thisdoesnotnecessarilymeantheprojectorisnotfunctioning

properly.WiththeimplementationofHDCP,theremaybecasesinwhichcertaincontentisprotectedwithHDCPandmightnotbedisplayeddue to thedecision/intentionof theHDCPcommunity (DigitalContentProtection,LLC).

*6:35to40ºC–“Forcedecomode”

- Thesespecificationsandtheproduct’sdesignaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.

211

9. Appendix

499 (19.6")

250 (9.8")

164

(6.5

")

144

(5.7

")78

.6(3

.1")

200

(7.9

")35

9 (1

4.1"

)

368.

1 (1

4.5"

)

Cabinet Dimensions

Lens center

Lens center

Holes for ceiling mount

Unit:mm(inch)

Unit:mm(inch)

212

9. Appendix

Mounting the cable cover (sold separately)

Mounting the separately sold cable cover on the projector allows you hide the cables for a cleanerappearance.

CAUTION• Aftermountingthecablecover,besuretofastenusingthescrewsprovided.Ifnot,thecablecovercouldfall,

damagingthecablecoverandpossiblyresultingininjury.

• Donotbundlethepowercordandplaceitunderthecablecover.Doingsocouldleadtofire.

• Donotapplyexcessive forceto thecablecover.Doingsocoulddamagethecablecover, resulting in theprojectorfallingorcausinginjury.

MountingPreparations:

1. Connect the power cord and cables to the projector (the connection cords are omitted from the diagrams).

2. Prepare a Phillips screwdriver.

1. Insert the two round protrusions on the left and right edges of the cable cover into the grooves in the bottom of the projector to line it up.

NOTE:Becarefulnottoletthepowercordandcablesgetpinchedbythecablecover.

2. Turnthecablecoverscrewclockwise.

- Tighten the screw securely.

Removing1. Turnthecablecoverscrewcounterclockwiseuntilitturns

loosely.

- Hold the cable cover while doing this to prevent it from falling.

- The screw does not come completely off.

2. Remove the cable cover.

- Turn the cable cover a little, then lift it off.

1

2

1

2

213

9. Appendix

Mini D-Sub 15 Pin Connector Pin Assignments of D-Sub COMPUTER Input Connector

SignalLevelVideosignal:0.7Vp-p(Analog)Syncsignal:TTLlevel

51 42 310

11 12 13 14 156 97 8

COMPUTER 1 INNOTE:PinNos.12and15arerequiredforDDC/CI(VirtualRemoteTool).

PinNo. RGBSignal(Analog) YCbCrSignal

1 Red Cr 2 GreenorSynconGreen Y 3 Blue Cb 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 RedGround CrGround 7 GreenGround YGround 8 BlueGround CbGround 9 NoConnection 10 SyncSignalGround 11 NoConnection 12 Bi-directionalDATA(SDA) 13 HorizontalSyncorCompositeSync 14 VerticalSync 15 DataClock

214

9. Appendix

TroubleshootingThissectionhelpsyouresolveproblemsyoumayencounterwhilesettinguporusingtheprojector.

Indicator Messages

PowerIndicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus ProcedureOff Powerisoff. –Flashing Blue(shortflashes) Preparingtoturnpoweron Waitawhile.

Blue(longflashes) Offtimer(enabled)Programtimer(offtimeenabled)

–

Orange(shortflashes)

Projectorcooling Waitawhile.

Orange(longflashes) Programtimer(ontimeenabled)Lit Blue Poweron –

Orange Standby mode (NORMAL or NETWORKSTANDBY)

–

Red Standbymode(POWER-SAVING) –

Status Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus ProcedureOff Noproblem,or

standbymode(POWER-SAVINGor NETWORKSTAND-BY)

–

Flashing Red(cyclesof1)

Coverproblem Thelampcoverisnotproperlymounted.Mountitproperly.(→ Page161)

Red(cyclesof4)

Fanproblem Thecoolingfanhasstoppedturning.ContactanNECprojectorcustomersupportcenterforrepairs.

Red(cyclesof9)

Iriserror The iris is not operating properly. Contact an NEC projectorcustomersupportcenterforrepairs.

Flashing Orange Networkconflict It is not possible to connect the projector’s built-in LAN andwirelessLANsimultaneouslytothesamenetwork.Toconnecttheprojector’sbuilt-inLANandwirelessLANsimultaneously,connectthemtodifferentnetworks.

Lit Green Standbymode(NORMAL)

–

Orange Buttonhasbeenpressedwhileprojectorisinkeylockmode

Theprojector’skeysarelocked.Thesettingmustbecanceledtooperatetheprojector.(→Page106)

Projector’sIDnumberandremotecontrol’sIDnumberdonotmatch

CheckthecontrolIDs.(→Pages106 and 107)

215

9. Appendix

Lamp Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus ProcedureOff Thelampisturnedoff. –Flashing Green Preparingtorelightlampafter

lightinghasfailedWaitawhile.

Red Lampreplacementgraceperiod

The lamphas reached theendof itsservice lifeandis now in the replacement grace period (100 hours).Replacethelampassoonaspossible.(→page159)

Red(cyclesof6)

Lampdoesnotlight Thelamphasnotturnedon.Waitatleast1minute,thenturnthepowerbackon.Ifthelampstilldoesnotlight,contactanNECprojectorcustomersupportcenter.

Lit Red Lampusagetimeexceeded Thelamphasexceededitsusagetime.Theprojector’spowercannotbeturnedonuntilthelampisreplaced.(→page159)

Green Lamplit –

Temp. Indicator

Indicatordisplay Projectorstatus ProcedureOff NoproblemFlashing Red(cyclesof2) Temperatureproblem The temperature protector has been activated. If the

roomtemperatureishigh,movetheprojectortoacoolplace. If the problem still persists, contact an NECprojectorcustomersupportcenter.

Lit Orange Highsurroundingtemperature Thesurroundingtemperature ishigh.Lower theroomtemperature.

If the temperature protector is activatedIf the projector’s internal temperature rises abnormally, the lamp turns off and the temperature indicator flashes(repeatedlyincyclesof2).Itmayhappenthattheprojector’stemperatureprotectorissimultaneouslyactivatedandtheprojector’spowerturnsoff.Ifthishappens,dothefollowing:

- Unplugthepowercordfromthepoweroutlet.

- Ifusinginaplacewherethesurroundingtemperatureishigh,movetheprojectortoadifferent,coolplace.

- Ifthereisdustintheventilationholes,clean.(→ pages 155 and 158)

- Waitassuchabout1hourfortheprojector’sinternaltemperaturetolower.

216

9. Appendix

Common Problems & Solutions(→“Power/Status/LampIndicator”onpage214.)

Problem CheckTheseItems

Does not turn onor shut down

• Checkthatthepowercordispluggedinandthatthepowerbuttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol is on� (→ pages 13, 14)

• Ensurethatthelampcoverisinstalledcorrectly.(→ page 161)• Checktoseeiftheprojectorhasoverheated.Ifthereisinsufficientventilationaroundtheprojectororifthe

room where you are presenting is particularly warm, move the projector to a cooler location�• Checktoseeifyoucontinuetousetheprojectorforanother100hoursafterthelamphasreachedtheend

of its life� If so, replace the lamp� After replacing the lamp, reset the lamp hours used� (→ page 116)• Thelampmayfailtolight.Waitafullminuteandthenturnonthepoweragain.• Set[FANMODE]to[HIGHALTITUDE]whenusingtheprojectorataltitudesapproximately5500feet/1600

meters or higher� Using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters or higher without setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the projector to overheat and the projector could shut down� If this happens, wait a couple minutes and turn on the projector� (→ page 108)

If you turn on the projector immediately after the lamp is turned off, the fans run without displaying an image for some time and then the projector will display the image� Wait for a moment�

Will turn off • Ensurethatthe[OFFTIMER],[AUTOPOWEROFF]or[PROGRAMTIMER]isoff.(→ page 101, 111)

No picture • Check if the appropriate input is selected� (→ page 16) If there is still no picture, press the SOURCE button or one of the input buttons again�

• Ensureyourcablesareconnectedproperly.• Usemenustoadjustthebrightnessandcontrast.(→ page 93)• Ensurethatthelenscoverisopen.(→ page 14)• Resetthesettingsoradjustmentstofactorypresetlevelsusingthe[RESET]intheMenu.(→ page 116)• EnteryourregisteredkeywordiftheSecurityfunctionisenabled.(→ page 37)• If the HDMI input or the DisplayPort signal cannot be displayed, try the following�

- Reinstall your driver for the graphics card built in your computer, or use the updated driver� For reinstalling or updating your driver, refer to the user guide accompanied with your computer or graphics

card, or contact the support center for your computer manufacturer�Install the updated driver or OS on your own responsibility�We are not liable for any trouble and failure caused by this installation�

• BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningon the power to the notebook PC�

In most cases the output signal from the notebook PC is not turned on unless connected to the projector before being powered up�* If the screen goes blank while using your remote control, it may be the result of the computer’s screen-saver

or power management software�• Seealsothepage218�

Picture suddenly becomes dark

• CheckiftheprojectorisintheForcedECOmodebecauseoftoohighambienttemperature.Ifthisisthecase,lower the internal temperature of the projector by selecting [HIGH] for [FAN MODE]� (→ page 108)

Color tone or hue is unusual

• Checkifanappropriatecolor isselectedin[WALLCOLOR].Ifso,selectanappropriateoption.(→ page 101)

• Adjust[HUE]in[PICTURE].(→ page 93)

Image isn’t square to the screen

• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 17)• UsetheKeystonecorrectionfunctiontocorrectthetrapezoiddistortion.(→ page 22)

Picture is blurred • Adjustthefocus.(→ page 19)• Repositiontheprojectortoimproveitsangletothescreen.(→ page 17)• Ensure that the distance between the projector and screen iswithin the adjustment range of the lens.

(→ page 201)• Has the lens been shifted by an amount exceeding the guaranteed range? (→ page 205)• Condensationmayformonthelensiftheprojectoriscold,broughtintoawarmplaceandisthenturnedon.

Should this happen, let the projector stand until there is no condensation on the lens�

217

9. Appendix

Flicker appears on screen

• Set [FAN MODE] to other than [HIGH ALTITUDE] mode when using the projector at altitudes approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters or lower� Using the projector at altitudes less than approximately 5500 feet/1600 meters and setting to [HIGH ALTITUDE] can cause the lamp to overcool, causing the image to flicker� Switch [FAN MODE] to [AUTO]� (→ page 108)

Image is scrolling vertically, horizontally or both

• Checkthecomputer’sresolutionandfrequency.Makesurethattheresolutionyouaretryingtodisplayissupported by the projector� (→ page 207)

• AdjustthecomputerimagemanuallywiththeHorizontal/Verticalinthe[IMAGEOPTIONS].(→ page 95)

Remote control does not work

• Installnewbatteries.(→ page 9)• Makesuretherearenoobstaclesbetweenyouandtheprojector.• Standwithin22feet(7m)oftheprojector.(→ page 9)• To perform computer mouse operations using the projector’s remote control, connect the optional mouse

receiver to the computer� (→ page 30)

Indicator is lit or blinking

• SeethePOWER/STATUS/LAMPIndicator.(→ page 214)

Cross color in RGB mode

• PresstheAUTOADJ.buttonontheprojectorcabinetortheremotecontrol.(→ page 24)• Adjust thecomputer imagemanuallywith [CLOCK]/[PHASE] in [IMAGEOPTIONS] in themenu. (→ page

94)

Formoreinformationcontactyourdealer.

218

9. Appendix

If there is no picture, or the picture is not displayed correctly.

• PoweronprocessfortheprojectorandthePC.

BesuretoconnecttheprojectorandnotebookPCwhiletheprojectorisinstandbymodeandbeforeturningonthepowertothenotebookPC.

InmostcasestheoutputsignalfromthenotebookPCisnotturnedonunlessconnectedtotheprojectorbeforebeingpoweredup.

NOTE:Youcancheckthehorizontalfrequencyofthecurrentsignalintheprojector’smenuunderInformation.Ifitreads“0kHz”,thismeansthereisnosignalbeingoutputfromthecomputer.(→page113orgotonextstep)

• Enablingthecomputer’sexternaldisplay.

DisplayinganimageonthenotebookPC’sscreendoesnotnecessarilymeanitoutputsasignaltotheprojector.WhenusingaPCcompatiblelaptop,acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexternaldisplay.Usu-ally,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysgetstheexternaldisplaytocomeonoroff.Forexample,NEClaptopsuseFn+F3,whileDelllaptopsuseFn+F8keycombinationstotogglethroughexternaldisplayselections.

• Non-standardsignaloutputfromthecomputer

IftheoutputsignalfromanotebookPCisnotanindustrystandard,theprojectedimagemaynotbedisplayedcorrectly.Shouldthishappen,deactivatethenotebookPC’sLCDscreenwhentheprojectordisplayisinuse.EachnotebookPChasadifferentwayofdeactivate/reactivatethelocalLCDscreensasdescribedinthepreviousstep.Refertoyourcomputer’sdocumentationfordetailedinformation.

• ImagedisplayedisincorrectwhenusingaMacintosh

WhenusingaMacintoshwiththeprojector,settheDIPswitchoftheMacadapter(notsuppliedwiththeprojector)accordingtoyourresolution.Aftersetting,restartyourMacintoshforthechangestotakeaffect.

ForsettingdisplaymodesotherthanthosesupportedbyyourMacintoshandtheprojector,changingtheDIPswitchonaMacadaptermaybounceanimageslightlyormaydisplaynothing.Shouldthishappen,settheDIPswitchtothe13"fixedmodeandthenrestartyourMacintosh.Afterthat,restoretheDIPswitchestoadisplayablemodeandthenrestarttheMacintoshagain.

NOTE:AVideoAdaptercablemanufacturedbyAppleComputerisneededforaPowerBookwhichdoesnothaveaminiD-Sub15-pinconnector.

• MirroringonaPowerBook

* WhenusingtheprojectorwithaMacintoshPowerBook,outputmaynotbesetto1024×768unless“mirroring”isoffonyourPowerBook.Refertoowner’smanualsuppliedwithyourMacintoshcomputerformirroring.

• FoldersoriconsarehiddenontheMacintoshscreen

Foldersoriconsmaynotbeseenonthescreen.Shouldthishappen,select[View]→[Arrange]fromtheApplemenuandarrangeicons.

219

9. Appendix

NOTE:ContactyourlocaldealerforafulllistofthePCControlCodesifneeded.

Cable ConnectionCommunicationProtocol

Baud rate ��38400 bpsData length ��8 bitsParity ��No parityStop bit ��One bitX on/off ��NoneCommunications procedure ��Full duplex

NOTE:Dependingontheequipment,alowerbaudratemayberecommendedforlongcableruns.

PC Control Connector (D-SUB 9P)

PC Control Codes and Cable ConnectionPC Control Codes

Function Code Data

POWER ON 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 02H

POWER OFF 02H 01H 00H 00H 00H 03H

INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 1 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 01H 09H

INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 2 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 02H 0AH

INPUT SELECT COMPUTER 3 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 03H 0BH

INPUT SELECT HDMI 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 1AH 22H

INPUT SELECT DisplayPort 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 1BH 23H

INPUT SELECT VIDEO 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 06H 0EH

INPUT SELECT S-VIDEO 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 0BH 13H

INPUT SELECT VIEWER 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 1FH 27H

INPUT SELECT NETWORK 02H 03H 00H 00H 02H 01H 20H 28H

PICTURE MUTE ON 02H 10H 00H 00H 00H 12H

PICTURE MUTE OFF 02H 11H 00H 00H 00H 13H

SOUND MUTE ON 02H 12H 00H 00H 00H 14H

SOUND MUTE OFF 02H 13H 00H 00H 00H 15H

NOTE1:Pins1,4,6and9arenoused.

NOTE2:Jumper“RequesttoSend”and“CleartoSend”togetheronbothendsofthecabletosimplifycableconnection.

NOTE3:Forlongcablerunsitisrecommendedtosetcommunicationspeedwithinprojectormenusto9600bps.

1 52 43

6 7 98

To GND of PC

To RxD of PC

To TxD of PC

To RTS of PC

To CTS of PC

220

9. Appendix

No image is displayed from your PC or video equipment to the projector�

Still no image even though you connect the projector to the PC first, then start the PC�Enabling your notebook PC’s signal output to the projector�• Acombinationoffunctionkeyswillenable/disabletheexter-naldisplay.Usually,thecombinationofthe“Fn”keyalongwithoneofthe12functionkeysturnstheexternaldisplayon or off.

No image (blue or black background, no display)�Still no image even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button�Still no image even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu�Signal cable’s plug is fully inserted into the input connectorA message appears on the screen�( _____________________________________________ )The source connected to the projector is active and available�Still no image even though you adjust the brightness and/or the contrast�Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector�

Troubleshooting Check ListBeforecontactingyourdealerorservicepersonnel,checkthefollowinglisttobesurerepairsareneededalsobyreferringtothe“Troubleshooting”sectioninyouruser’smanual.Thischecklistbelowwillhelpussolveyourproblemmoreefficiently.*Printthispageandthenextpageforyourcheck.

Frequency of occurrence always sometimes (How often?_____________________) other (__________________)Power

No power (POWER indicator does not light blue) See also “Status Indicator (STATUS)”�

Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�Main power switch is pressed to the ON position�Lamp cover is installed correctly�Lamp Hours Used (lamp operation hours) was cleared after lamp replacement�No power even though you press and hold the POWER button for 1 second�

Shut down during operation�Power cord’s plug is fully inserted into the wall outlet�Lamp cover is installed correctly�[AUTO POWER OFF] is turned off (only models with the [AUTO POWER OFF] function)�[OFF TIMER] is turned off (only models with the [OFF TIMER] function)�

Video and Audio

Image is too dark�Remains unchanged even though you adjust the brightness and/or the contrast�

Image is distorted�Image appears to be trapezoidal (unchanged even though you carry out the [KEYSTONE] adjustment)�

Parts of the image are lost�Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button�Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu�

Image is shifted in the vertical or horizontal direction�Horizontal and vertical positions are correctly adjusted on a computer signal�Input source’s resolution and frequency are supported by the projector�Some pixels are lost�

Image is flickering�Still unchanged even though you press the AUTO ADJUST button�Still unchanged even though you carry out [RESET] in the projector’s menu�Image shows flickering or color drift on a computer signal�Still unchanged even though you change [FAN MODE] from [HIGH ALTITUDE] to [AUTO]�

Image appears blurry or out of focus�Still unchanged even though you checked the signal’s resolution on PC and changed it to projector’s native resolution�Still unchanged even though you adjusted the focus�

No sound�Audio cable is correctly connected to the audio input of the projector�Still unchanged even though you adjusted the volume level�AUDIO OUT is connected to your audio equipment (only models with the AUDIO OUT connector)�

OtherRemote control does not work�

No obstacles between the sensor of the projector and the remote control�Projector is placed near a fluorescent light that can disturb the infrared remote controls�Batteries are new and are not reversed in installation�

Buttons on the projector cabinet do not work (only models with the [CONTROL PANEL LOCK] function)

[CONTROL PANEL LOCK] is not turned on or is disabled in the menu�Still unchanged even though you press and hold the EXIT button for a minimum of 10 seconds�

221

9. Appendix

In the space below please describe your problem in detail.

Information on application and environment where your projector is used

Projector

Model number:Serial No�:Date of purchase:Lamp operating time (hours):Eco Mode: OFF ONInformation on input signal:

Horizontal synch frequency [ ] kHzVertical synch frequency [ ] HzSynch polarity H (+) (−) V (+) (−)Synch type Separate Composite

Sync on GreenSTATUS Indicator:

Steady light Orange GreenFlashing light [ ] cycles

Remote control model number:

Signalcable

NEC standard or other manufacturer’s cable?Model number: Length: inch/m

Distribution amplifierModel number:

SwitcherModel number:

AdapterModel number:

Projector PC

DVD player

Installation environment

Screen size: inchScreen type: White matte Beads Polarization Wide angle High contrast Throw distance: feet/inch/m Orientation: Ceiling mount DesktopPower outlet connection:

Connected directly to wall outlet Connected to power cord extender or other (the

number of connected equipment______________) Connected to a power cord reel or other (the number

of connected equipment______________)

Computer

Manufacturer:

Model number:

Notebook PC / Desktop

Native resolution:

Refresh rate:

Video adapter:

Other:

Videoequipment

VCR, DVD player, Video camera, Video game or other

Manufacturer:

Model number:

222

9. Appendix

TravelCare GuideTravelCare - a service for international travelersThisproductiseligiblefor“TravelCare”,NEC’suniqueinternationalwarrantyandrepairservice.FormoreinformationonTravelCareservice,visitourwebsite(inEnglishonly).http://www.nec-display.com/dl/en/pj_support/travel_care.html

©NECDisplaySolutions,Ltd.2011 7N951591